Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Alcatel-Lucent GSM
Telecom Parameters Dictionary
OMC Document Reference Guide Release B11
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09
BLANK PAGE BREAK
Status Short title
RELEASED
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2 / 1278
Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1 Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.2 Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 VGCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 LCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 IP Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 GSM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 5.3 System (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 6.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 6.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 7.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 7.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 DTM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 8.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 9.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208 2G-3G Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 10.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 10.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
2 3
4 5
8 9 10
3 / 1278
Contents
4 / 1278
Preface
Preface
Purpose Whats New
The BSS Parameter Dictionary lists all of the Telecom Parameters for GSM and GPRS.
In Edition 09
This document was generated from the edition 18rl of the BSS Telecom Parameters database.
In Edition 08
In Edition 07
In Edition 06
In Edition 05
In Edition 04
In Edition 03
In Edition 02
5 / 1278
Preface
In Edition 01
First official release of document.
Audience Assumed Knowledge
This manual is designed for OMC-R users, O&M technicians and system designers. Not applicable.
6 / 1278
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
7 / 1278
1 Introduction
1.1 Parameter Classification

The GSM and GPRS parameters are classified into three categories: Network: customer dependent parameters, related to the network topology, defined by the customer and valid for the complete network (e.g. BTS name, Cell ID, LAC number ...). They can be adjusted by CDE scripts. Site: adjustable parameters from one cell to the next or from one BSC to the next. They are set to a default value. They can be adjusted from the OMC-R. System: fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules or automatically populated in the DLS skeleton and let unchanged because not customer dependent. Some of them are coded in BTS Software and configuration files.
1.2 Parameter Description

To each parameter are associated the following characteristics: Logical Parameter Name: Mnemonic conventionally used in Alcatel documentation. Definition: definition/purpose of the parameter. Coding rules:, Rules of coding, when necessary. Mandatory rules: Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some data. Recommended rules: Recommended relationships or inter-dependence of some data. Feature: Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked. Category: Category into which the parameter is classified. Instance: Possible instance of the parameter. Value Min/Max values: Possible range of the parameter values. Default value: Parameter value in release B9 for a generic configuration. Modifiable: Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R. Parameter Access: Indicates where the parameter is accessible at the OMC-R. External Comments: Specific information, when necessary, related to the parameter.
8 / 1278
2 VGCS Telecom Parameters
9 / 1278
2.1 Site (CAE)

2.1.1 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n) CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a different location area. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 6
Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
No No
10 / 1278
2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
No No
11 / 1278
2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INBAND_NOTIF EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification 0: disabled, 1:enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
12 / 1278
2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INBAND_PAGING EN_INBAND_PAGING
Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
13 / 1278
2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_UPLINK_REPLY EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
14 / 1278
2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_VGCS EN_VGCS
Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell 0: disabled, 1: enabled When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended to - include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED message (RESP_REQ). - to configure, at least, one TRX with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 in the cell. - to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
No No
15 / 1278
2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INBAND_PAGING_THR INBAND_PAGING_THR
If the eMLPP priority included in the Paging message from the MSC is higher than or equal to this parameter, then the BSS shall trigger in-band paging within cells, that are identified to be paged from the PAGING message, and that have existing VGC active. Coded over 3 bits 000 : deactivation of inband paging 001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority) 010 : call priority level 3 011 : call priority level 2 100 : call priority level 1 101 : call priority level 0 110 : call priority level B 111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Coding rules
Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
No No
16 / 1278
2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_VGCS_TS MAX_VGCS_TS
Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCS calls in the cell. MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) < Total number of TCHs of the cell". If EN_VGCS= disabled, then" MAX_VGCS_TS = 0" Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
Coding rules Mandatory rules
External Comment
127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. To support VGCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_VGCS_TS >0 No No
Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
17 / 1278
2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_VGCS_TS MIN_VGCS_TS
Minimum number of radio timeslots that are reserved for the VGCS calls in the cell in normal situation (point-to-point CS call can NOT use these timeslots). MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS - The following rules about the upper limit are recommended : i) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined" ii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 3 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined" iii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX. - If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2
Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules
Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 0
127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
18 / 1278
2.1.10 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently: - Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); - Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); - Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
19 / 1278
2.1.11 (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all other on-going VGCS call. Coded over 3 bits 000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of other on-going VGCS calls 001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority) 010 : call priority level 3 011 : call priority level 2 100 : call priority level 1 101 : call priority level 0 110 : call priority level B 111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
20 / 1278
2.1.12 (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all on-going point to point call whose MS is VGCS capable. Coded over 3 bits 000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of all on going point to point calls in the cell 001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority) 010 : call priority level 3 011 : call priority level 2 100 : call priority level 1 101 : call priority level 0 110 : call priority level B 111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
21 / 1278
2.1.13 (NOTIF_PCH_THR) - (NOTIF_PCH_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_PCH_THR NOTIF_PCH_THR
The priority threshold for notification over PCH. The BSS shall consider, for Notification/PCH, only VGCS-Calls which have a priority (eMLPP priority) not below this parameter. If more than one is selected, all these voice group calls shall be notified on PCH and all with the same frequency of occurrence. Coded over 3 bits 000 : deactivation of notification on PCH in the cell 001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority) 010 : call priority level 3 011 : call priority level 2 100 : call priority level 1 101 : call priority level 0 110 : call priority level B 111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
22 / 1278
2.1.14 (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS) - (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
This parameter defines the maximum number of blocks usable for NCH. if EN_VGCS is enabled : - BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS - if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
The parameter is significant when EN_VGCS is enabled No No
23 / 1278
2.1.15 (NY2) - (NY2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NY2 NY2
Maximum number of repetitions for the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message during an uplink access procedure Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 3
No No
24 / 1278
2.1.16 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
External Comment Cell Type Dependent
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) 20 s (0) 20 s (0) inhibited (31) inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
25 / 1278
2.1.17 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
26 / 1278
2.1.18 (START_UPLINK_REPLY) - (START_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition START_UPLINK_REPLY START_UPLINK_REPLY
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) during the initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. before sending the first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 1024 Default 256
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true. No No
27 / 1278
2.1.19 (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY) - (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
This Timer is used to delay the Multiple SACCH Info Modify and the VGCS_ADD_INFO in order to give the MS a chance to receive the immediately transmitted VGCS_ADD_INFO/FACCH and SI6 messages step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 1000 Default 200
No No
28 / 1278
2.1.20 (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE) (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
This parameter defines the repetition period of CHANNEL RELEASE message sent on FACCH step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1000 Default 200
No No
29 / 1278
2.1.21 (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE) - (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Delay between consecutive repetitions of the UPLINK FREE message, sent to the mobile station. The UPLINK FREE messages shall be repeated as long as no uplink is granted to a mobile station. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 480 Default 200
No No
30 / 1278
2.1.22 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Guard timer to wait for an Uplink Access. If no such bursts are received at this timer expiry, the BSC releases the voice group call channel in that cell and provide notifications containing no channel description. step size = 1sec T_Wait_Uplink_Access >= [START_UPLINK_REPLY + (10 * WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)] * T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 300 Default 60
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true No No
31 / 1278
2.1.23 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK) (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Guard timer to wait for UPLINK REQUEST ACK or UPLINK REQUEST REJECT message from the MSC. step size = 500 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 500 Maximum 5000 Default 500
No No
32 / 1278
2.1.24 (T14) - (T14)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T14 T14
Maximum queuing time for the VGCS Assignment Requests step size = 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 19 Default 6
No No
33 / 1278
2.1.25 (T3115) - (T3115)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3115 T3115
This timer is used for the repetition of the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message during the uplink access procedure. If the timer expires before the reception of a correctly decoded frame from MS, the BTS repeats the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to the requesting MS step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 480 Default 200
No No
34 / 1278
2.1.26 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TEMPORARY_OFFSET TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME. step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) infinity (7) infinity (7) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
35 / 1278
2.1.27 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
This parameter defines the type of FR AMR codec used in the network. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1 AMR Full Rate Codec 12,2 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 10,2 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s; AMR Full Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/st;
Coding rules
No No
36 / 1278
2.1.28 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
This parameter defines the type of HR AMR codec used in the network. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 5 Default 4 AMR Half Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s; AMR Half Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s; AMR Half Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s; AMR Half Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s; AMR Half Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s; AMR Half Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/s;
Coding rules
External Comment
AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,95 kb/s is not supported by Alcatel BSS. AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,4kb/s is not supported as a "stand-alone" codec No No
37 / 1278
2.1.29 (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) per cycle, during the non-initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. after sending the first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H). Each time the value of this counter becomes zero, the BTS send one UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 3
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true. No No
38 / 1278
3 LCS Telecom Parameters
39 / 1278
3.1 Network (CDE)

3.1.1 (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN) - (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Confidence origin used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 50.7
No No
40 / 1278
3.1.2 (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Slope ratio between the confidence and the arc factor used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 25
No No
41 / 1278
3.1.3 (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Slope ratio between the confidence and the sum of minimum radius factor and maximum radius factor used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.01 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15.28
No No
42 / 1278
3.1.4 (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST) (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the types of optional assistance data to be retrieved from the A-GPS server when using the MS based A-GPS positioning method. The following optional assistance data type are considered: Almanac, UTC model, DGPS corrections, reference time, acquisition assistance, real-time integrity. bit 8 (most significant) and bit 7 are not used (i.e. always set to 0); bit 6=1: real-time integrity is retrieived; bit 5=1: acquisition assistance is retrieived; bit 4=1: reference time is retrieived; bit 3=1: DGPS corrections is retrieived; bit 2=1: UTC model is retrieived; bit 1 (least significant)=1: Almanac is retrieived. Network (CDE) Reference MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
43 / 1278
3.1.5 (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1) - (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1 PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1
The most preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
Mandatory rules Recommended rules
No No
44 / 1278

The second preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
No No
45 / 1278

The third preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 3
No No
46 / 1278
3.1.8 (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT) - (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer controls the retransmission timeout for the sending of the individual data segments. step size = 1 second Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
No No
47 / 1278
3.1.9 (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL) (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer determines the interval separating keep alive retransmissions until a response is received. Once a response is received, the delay until the next keep alive transmission is again controlled by the value of this timer. The connection will be aborted after the number of retransmissions specified by SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS have gone unanswered. step size = 1 second Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
No No
48 / 1278
3.1.10 (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS) (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This parameter controls the number of times TCP will retransmit an individual data segment before aborting the connection. The retransmission timeout is given by the parameter SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
No No
49 / 1278
3.1.11 (T_SAGI_GUARD) - (T_SAGI_GUARD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_SAGI_GUARD T_SAGI_GUARD
Timer to guard the response from the A-GPS server (on SAGI: interface with A-GPS server). step size = 1 sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 60
The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_SAGI=1. No No
50 / 1278
3.2 Site (CAE)

3.2.1 (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR) - (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ARC_SIZE_FACTOR ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 1.5 Default 1.2
No No
51 / 1278
3.2.2 (AZIMUTH) - (LCS_AZIMUTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AZIMUTH LCS_AZIMUTH
Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). 0: 0 degree,..., 359: 359 degree, 360: omnidirectional cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 360 Default 0
0 corresponds to the North orientation and is counted clockwise. No No
52 / 1278
3.2.3 (EN_CONV_GPS) - (EN_CONV_GPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CONV_GPS EN_CONV_GPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method Conventional GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled EN_CONV_GPS = 0 (from B11 MR3) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when EN_LCS=1. - Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3) No No
53 / 1278
3.2.4 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_LCS EN_LCS (BSC)
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled - Equal to EN_LCS (MFS) - EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3) - EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3). - Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3) No No
54 / 1278
3.2.5 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_LCS EN_LCS (MFS)
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled - Equal to EN_LCS (BSC) - EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3) - EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3). - Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3) No No
55 / 1278
3.2.6 (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Assisted A-GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled - EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
56 / 1278
3.2.7 (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MS_BASED_AGPS EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Based A-GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled - EN_MS_BASED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
57 / 1278
3.2.8 (EN_SAGI) - (EN_SAGI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SAGI EN_SAGI
Flag indicating whether SAGI (interface with the A-GPS server) is configured or not for this BSS. 0: disabled; 1: enabled - EN_SAGI = 0 (from B11 MR3) Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
- Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3) No No
58 / 1278
3.2.9 (Geographical Coordinates) (GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Geographical Coordinates GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG
Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not. 0: not significant, 1: significant Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
59 / 1278
3.2.10 (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH) - (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Antenna half power beam for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). 0: half power beam width unknown, 1: 1 degree,..., 360: 360 degree (omnidirectional cell) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 360 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
60 / 1278
3.2.11 (LATITUDE) - (LCS_LATITUDE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LATITUDE LCS_LATITUDE
Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). Sequence of: - number of degrees (from 0 to 90) - number of minutes (from 0 to 59) - number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999) - direction (boolean, true for South and false for North) Site (CAE) List of numbers MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0,0,0,false Maximum Default
Coding rules
90,59,9999,true #
External Comment
1) 0 latitude corresponds to the Equator; 2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Latitude". No No
61 / 1278
3.2.12 (LONGITUDE) - (LCS_LONGITUDE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LONGITUDE LCS_LONGITUDE
Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). Sequence of: - number of degrees (from 0 to 180) - number of minutes (from 0 to 59) - number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999) - direction (boolean, true for West and false for East) Site (CAE) List of numbers MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0,0,0,false Maximum Default
Coding rules
180,59,9999,true #
External Comment
1) 0 longitude corresponds to the Greenwich Meridian; 2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Longitude". No No
62 / 1278
3.2.13 (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.05 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1 Default 0.6
No No
63 / 1278
3.2.14 (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.05 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1 Default 0.85
No No
64 / 1278
3.2.15 (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. step size = 1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 10
The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1. No No
65 / 1278
3.2.16 (T_LCS_Low_Delay) - (T_LCS_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LCS_Low_Delay T_LCS_Low_Delay
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request. step size = 0.1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 180 Default 3
66 / 1278
3.2.17 (T_Loc_abort) - (T_Loc_abort)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Loc_abort T_Loc_abort
BSC timer supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location Abort. step size = 0.1 sec T_Loc_abort < T_Location Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 2
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1. No No
67 / 1278
3.2.18 (T_Location) - (T_Location)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Location T_Location
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location request, when no RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. step size = 0.1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 15
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1. No No
68 / 1278
3.2.19 (T_Location_Longer) - (T_Location_Longer)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Location_Longer T_Location_Longer
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location request, when a RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. step size = 1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay T_Location_Longer > T_Location Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 30
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1, and replaces T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS Assisted A-GPS and MS Based A-GPS positioning methods. No No
69 / 1278
3.2.20 (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. step size = 1 sec T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant > T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 9
70 / 1278
3.2.21 (T_RRLP_Low_Delay) - (T_RRLP_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RRLP_Low_Delay T_RRLP_Low_Delay
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Low Delay Location Request. step size = 0.1 sec T_Low_Delay > T_RRLP_Low_Delay T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 120 Default 2
71 / 1278
72 / 1278
4 IP Telecom Parameters
73 / 1278
4.1 Site (CAE)

4.1.1 () - (MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE
State assigned to a given MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), for the load redistribution function. That function removes the "off loaded" MSC from the list of candidate MSCs on BSS side. 0: off loaded 1: on loaded Site (CAE) Flag BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled. - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - If a MSC server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid the MSC to enter the overload situation through the update of that parameter to "off loaded" for the concerned MSC. Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
No No
74 / 1278
4.1.2 () - (SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE
State assigned to a given SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature), for the load redistribution function. That function removes the "off loaded" SGSN from the list of candidate SGSNs on BSS side. 0: off loaded 1: on loaded In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN, must have the same SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE. Site (CAE) Flag MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled. - If a SGSN server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid the SGSN to enter the overload situation through the update of that parameter to "off loaded" for all the NSEs of all the BSSs connected to the concerned SGSN. Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
No No
75 / 1278
4.1.3 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side. coded on 15 characters string - ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a SCTP endpoint inside one MSC - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden Site (CAE) IP address BSC SCTP EndPoint Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
External Comment
Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lock the associated A Signalling Link (ASL). No No
76 / 1278
4.1.4 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2) (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2 ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2
Secondary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side. It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in MSC side. coded on 15 characters string - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden Site (CAE) IP address BSC SCTP EndPoint Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
External Comment
77 / 1278
4.1.5 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side. Up to 4 endpoints can be defined in that list. coded as an array of 4 entries Each entry is an SCTP endpoint, composed of ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1, ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT and ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2 When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of SCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_ Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC MSC Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lock the associated A Signalling Link(s) (ASL). No No
78 / 1278
4.1.6 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side. Step size = 1 ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a SCTP endpoint inside one MSC Site (CAE) Number BSC SCTP EndPoint Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
79 / 1278
4.1.7 (EN_A_FLEX) - (EN_A_FLEX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_A_FLEX EN_A_FLEX
Enables/disables the support of the "Aflex" feature (for signaling traffic). The Aflex feature allows a BSS to be connected to more than one MSC. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, up to 16 MSCs can be connected to one BSC. When EN_A_FLEX is disabled, only one MSC can be connected to one BSC. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - Support of A-Flex by the MSC server is mandatory. - Support of Virtual MGW feature by the Media Gateway is mandatory. Parameter change: Before disabling the feature from the BSC side, the operator must delete all the excessive MSCs (except one, ie no more than one MSC connected to the BSC). Before enabling the feature, the operator must have configured the NULL_NRI and NRI_LENGTH parameters. Then the Aflex feature deals with the unlocked MSC(s).
No No
80 / 1278
4.1.8 (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP) - (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_ASIG_OVER_IP EN_ASIG_OVER_IP
Enables/disables the support of "A signalling over IP" 0: disabled, 1: enabled - EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled. - EN_ASIG_OVER_IP can be enabled if, at least, one MSC SCTP endpoint has been configured. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: A BSC reset procedure is needed, after modification, to resynchronize all the channels of the A interface. This BSC reset leads to a total outage of several minutes. No telecom service is provided during this procedure.
No No
81 / 1278
4.1.9 (EN_GB_FLEX) - (EN_GB_FLEX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_GB_FLEX EN_GB_FLEX
Enables/disables the support of the "Gbflex" feature (for data and signaling traffic). The GbFlex feature allows a BSS to be connected to more than one SGSN. 0: disabled, 1: enabled - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP - If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1 - When EN_GB_FLEX is enabled, up to 8 SGSNs can be connected to one BSS. - When EN_GB_FLEX is disabled, only one SGSN can be connected to one BSS. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Support of Gb-Flex by the SGSN is mandatory. Parameter change: no impact on the on going telecom service. Before disabling the feature from the MFS side, the operator shall delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE per GPU, ie no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS).
No No
82 / 1278
4.1.10 (Gb_Configuration_Type) - (Gb_Configuration_Type)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Gb_Configuration_Type Gb_Configuration_Type
Configuration type used with Gb over IP. In case of static configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are given by O&M. In case of dynamic configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are sent dynamically by the SGSN. For that exchange, at least one pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint is previously given by O&M. 0 : Static configuration 1: Dynamic configuration In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration where Gb_Transport_Mode is IP, all the NSEs connected to the same SGSN, having children SGSN IPendpoint(s), must have the same Gb_Configuration_Type. Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
Gb_Configuration type is significant only when Gb_Transport mode is IP. Parameter change: before any parameter modification, the operator has to delete the children SGSN IP endpoint(s). No No
83 / 1278
4.1.11 (GPU_Gb_Base_IP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_IP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_Base_IP GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Base address of the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used to define the GPU_Gb_IP_Address of each GPU board (for Gb over IP interface). coded on 32 bits The last group is set to 000 (base address) Site (CAE) IP address MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default None
Coding rules
External Comment
Parameter change: if Gb_transport_Mode is already in IP mode, a change of this parameter must be followed by a manual reset of the associated GP/GPU (during the IP settings preparation phase, no manual reset is needed since the reset is automatically performed by the MFS at the feature activation time). No No
84 / 1278
4.1.12 (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_Base_UDP GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
Base port number of the UDP port number of the local Gb IP endpoint, used to define the GPU_Gb_UDP_port of each GPU board (for Gb over IP interface). Site (CAE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 63488 Maximum 64512 Default 64512
External Comment
85 / 1278
4.1.13 (GPU_Gb_IP_Address) - (GPU_Gb_IP_Address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_IP_Address GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Allows to display the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface) coded on 32 bits coded default value is for implementation purposes only Site (CAE) IP address MFS GPU Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default None
Coding rules
Calculated by the MFS from the GPU_Gb_Base_IP value. No No
86 / 1278
4.1.14 (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port) - (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_UDP_Port GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
Allows to display the UDP port number of the local Gb IP endpoint, used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface). Site (CAE) Number MFS GPU Unit None Minimum 63488 Maximum 64512 Default 64512
equal to GPU_Gb_base_UDP. No No
87 / 1278
4.1.15 (IP_Address) - (SGSN_IP_Address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IP_Address SGSN_IP_Address
IP address of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static configuration of Gb over IP interface. IP address of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in case of dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface. coded on 32 bits coded default value is for implementation purposes only - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port) must be unique per NSE. - in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be defined per NSE. - In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE. Site (CAE) IP address MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
88 / 1278
4.1.16 (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addresses used for Gb telecom protocols coded on 32 bits coded default value is for implementation purposes only Site (CAE) IP address MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default None
Coding rules
External Comment
89 / 1278
4.1.17 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Local primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the BSC side. coded on 15 characters string - LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden Site (CAE) IP address BSC SCTP EndPoint Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
No No
90 / 1278
4.1.18 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Local port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the BSC side. Step size = 1 LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC By default, the LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT values are taken in the range 61953-61999. It is recommended to change these values only in case of IOT issue with the MSC. In this case it is recommended: - to not use values in the range 0..49151 ("well known" and "iana registered" ports) -to avoid the values already used by other BSS protocols using IP, -and especially to not use the ports used by the IP_BSSAsig protocol (to avoid conflicts during the transition from Asig over TDM to Asig over IP).
Recommended rules
Site (CAE) Number BSC SCTP EndPoint Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
Parameter change: Before any modification of the Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of the Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.
91 / 1278
No No
92 / 1278
4.1.19 (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
The minimum number of active IP server processes (IPSP) in the MSC server required to handle the traffic with that MSC. When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of SCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP Site (CAE) Number BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
External Comment
- This parameter is significant when the TRAFFIC_MODE of the MSC is load sharing mode. - Parameter change: before any modification of the MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of the MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service. No No
93 / 1278
4.1.20 (MSC_CN_ID) - (MSC_CN_ID)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSC_CN_ID MSC_CN_ID
This parameter indicates, within a given PLMN, the Core Network Identifier. It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex feature. coded on 2 bytes The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MSC identifier yet. - All the MSCs, connected to one BSC, must have different MSC_CN_ID. - The operator must control that, in a PLMN, 2 MSCs must have 2 different MSC_CN_ID. Site (CAE) Number BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4095 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connected to that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change applied immediately on the new calls established after modification. No No
94 / 1278
4.1.21 (MSC_MCC) - (MSC_MCC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSC_MCC MSC_MCC
Mobile Country Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex feature. 3 digits BCD The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MCC yet. The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MCC field of the BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI. Site (CAE) Reference BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connected to that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN. No No
95 / 1278
4.1.22 (MSC_MNC) - (MSC_MNC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSC_MNC MSC_MNC
Mobile Network Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex feature. 3 digits BCD The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MNC yet. The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MNC field of the BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI. Site (CAE) Reference BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connected to that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN. No No
96 / 1278
4.1.23 (MSC_SPC) - (MSC_SPC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MSC_SPC MSC_SPC
Signalling Point Code of a given MSC, connected to the BSC. coded over 14 bits All the MSCs connected to one BSC must have different MSC_SPC. Site (CAE) Number BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to TRUE - "A signalling over IP" function is available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: Before any modification of the MSC_SPC, If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of the MSC_SPC, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service. No No
97 / 1278
4.1.24 (MSC_WEIGHT) - (MSC_WEIGHT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSC_WEIGHT MSC_WEIGHT
Weight assigned to a MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), for the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to a high capacity MSC. It is recommended to set a weight value consistent with the number of A-trunks connected to that MSC. Site (CAE) Number BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 1
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change applied immediately on the new calls established after modification. No No
98 / 1278
4.1.25 (NRI_LENGTH) - (NRI_LENGTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRI_LENGTH NRI_LENGTH
This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used by the BSC to derive the NRI value from the received temporary identity TMSI, and to identify the serving MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature). The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most significant bit of the NRI) of the TMSI, regardless of the NRI length. The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any length value yet. - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1 - NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1 - The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH is configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area. - A larger length allows to define/connect more MSCs per CS pool area, but reduce the number of available TMSI for a given time period, since the NRI is part of the TMSI. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change applied immediately on the new calls established after modification.
No No
99 / 1278
4.1.26 (NRI_LENGTH_PS) - (NRI_LENGTH_PS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRI_LENGTH_PS NRI_LENGTH_PS
This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used by the MFS to derive the NRI value from the received TLLI, and to identify the serving SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most significant bit of the NRI) of the TLLI, regardless of the NRI length. - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1 - NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1 The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH_PS is configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default None
Recommended rules
External Comment
Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled. Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.
No No
100 / 1278
4.1.27 (NRI_LIST) - (NRI_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRI_LIST NRI_LIST
List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be defined per MSC. The NRI is part of the temporary identity TMSI, which is assigned by the serving MSC to the MS. The BSC derives the NRI from any Initial layer 3 message, in order to identify the serving MSC. Coded on 2 bytes The empty list (length = 0) value 1024 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy list indicates that the operator does not provide any NRI yet. - 2 different MSCs, connected to the BSC, must have 2 different NRI_LIST. - A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs connected to the BSC (and especially when the BSC is in the overlapping zone of 2 CS pool areas). - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1 - The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs connected to the BSC - When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, the NRI_LIST must contain at least one NRI - The operator must control that one NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs, which serve in parallel a given CS pool area. - When several BSCs, belonging to the same CS pool area, are connected to the same MSC, the operator must control that the NRI_LIST of that MSC is configured with the same value in each BSC of the CS pool area. Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change applied immediately on the new calls established after modification.
101 / 1278
No No
102 / 1278
4.1.28 (NRI_LIST_PS) - (NRI_LIST_PS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRI_LIST_PS NRI_LIST_PS
List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be defined per SGSN (and at least one). The NRI is part of the temporary identity P-TMSI, which is assigned by the serving SGSN to the MS. The MFS derives the NRI from the TLLI received from the MS, in order to identify the serving SGSN. coded on 2 bytes The value 1024 is only defined for implementation purpose (it is not a valid value). - In a BSS, 2 different SGSNs must have 2 different NRI_LIST_PS. - A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST_PS of all the NSEs of one GP /GPU. - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1 - For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS. - For all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, the NSEs connected to one SGSN must all have the same NRI_LIST_PS, in order for a MS to be served by that dedicated SGSN inside the whole pool area (area belonging or not to the same MFS) - In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to one SGSN, must have the same NRI_LIST_PS. Site (CAE) List of numbers MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1024 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.
No No
103 / 1278
4.1.29 (NULL_NRI) - (NULL_NRI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NULL_NRI NULL_NRI
Upon reception of a message with that dummy/reserved NRI included, the BSC uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting one MSC, among the "on loaded" MSC connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), and for re-routing the received message to that MSC. coded on 2 bytes The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any null NRI yet. - NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1 - The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs connected to the BSC. The operator must control that the NULL_NRI is common inside all the BSSs of one PLMN. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only. Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change applied immediately on the new calls established after modification.
No No
104 / 1278
4.1.30 (NULL_NRI_PS) - (NULL_NRI_PS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NULL_NRI_PS NULL_NRI_PS
In UL cases, upon TLLI reception with that dummy/reserved NRI included, while a SGSN is not already selected for a mobile, the MFS uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting one SGSN among the "on loaded" SGSN connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). coded on 2 bytes - NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1 - For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS. The operator must control that the NULL_NRI_PS is common inside all the BSSs of one PLMN Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
Recommended rules
External Comment
No No
105 / 1278
4.1.31 (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Peer_NSE_Data_Weight Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
Indicates the data weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of static configuration of the Gb over IP interface. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
External Comment
Declared by the operator in case of static configuration. If Peer_NSE_Data_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be selected as a data endpoint by the load sharing function. No No
106 / 1278
4.1.32 (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
Indicates the signalling weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of static configuration of the Gb over IP interface. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
External Comment
Declared by the operator in case of static configuration. If Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be selected as a signalling endpoint. No No
107 / 1278
4.1.33 (Port_Number) - (SGSN_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Port_Number SGSN_UDP_Port
UDP port number of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static configuration of Gb over IP interface. UDP port number of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in case of dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface. - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port) must be unique per NSE. - in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be defined per NSE. - In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE. Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 1024 Maximum 65535 Default 49152
External Comment
Following IANA.org: "Registered Ports" are in the range 1024-49151 and "Dynamic and/or Private Ports" are those from 49152 through 65535 (ALU BSS ports are taken in the private range, however SGSN ports taken in the registered ports are accepted by the ALU BSS). No No
108 / 1278
4.1.34 (SGSN_ID) - (CN_ID_PS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SGSN_ID CN_ID_PS
This parameter uniquely identifies one SGSN inside one BSS for the Gbflex feature. For that, the operator has the possibility to use the Core Network Identifier, which is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id). But in such case, the same identifier can identify 2 different SGSN, belonging to 2 different PLMN. coded on 2 bytes - All the NSEs of one GP/GPU must have different CN_ID_PS. - The operator must control that, in a BSS, 2 SGSNs must have 2 different CN_ID_PS. - For a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour of the Gbflex feature, the operator must connect all the GP/GPU(s) to the same SGSN(s) and define the same CN_ID_PS on all the NSEs, connected to one SGSN. - It is highly recommended to extend that rule (same CN_ID_PS value for all the NSEs connected to one SGSN) in all the BSSs managed by the MFS; and even more, in the whole managed network. Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled - The default value depends on the configuration. The value given here is for implementation purposes only. - The operator must control that the BSS and all the SGSNs connected to that BSS via Gbflex feature must belong to the same PLMN. Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.
No No
109 / 1278
4.1.35 (SGSN_WEIGHT) - (SGSN_WEIGHT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SGSN_WEIGHT SGSN_WEIGHT
Weight assigned to a SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature), for the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to a high capacity SGSN, because it will be chosen more often than a SGSN with a lower weight (e.g. a SGSN with weight = 10 will be chosen twice as often as a SGSN with weight = 5). In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN, must have the same SGSN_WEIGHT. Same rule is to be extended to all the NSEs of all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, and connected to the same SGSN. Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 1
External Comment
No No
110 / 1278
4.1.36 (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR) - (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR
Number of times one SGSN is used, once selected by the Node Selection Function. There is no advantage to define different values for the BSSs of the MFS. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 10
External Comment
No No
111 / 1278
4.1.37 (START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) (START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
First IP address for the range of telecom addresses shown to the external world. The BSC deduces every address of its telecom endpoint from this base address. coded on 15 characters string - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden Site (CAE) IP address BSC BSC Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
External Comment
Parameter change: when this parameter is changed from the BSC operator terminal, the BSC resets autonomously. No No
112 / 1278
4.1.38 (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC) (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of BSC addresses used for telecom protocols coded on 15 characters string - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden Site (CAE) IP address BSC BSC Unit None Minimum None Maximum None Default None
External Comment
Parameter change: Changing the IP configuration (e.g. subnet mask, and so routing table) of any IP equipment of the network (BSC included) may impact the ongoing traffic. Usually, the change is also to be done accordingly in the gateway(s). As consequence, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to shut down the traffic before any change. No No
113 / 1278
4.1.39 (TRAFFIC_MODE) - (TRAFFIC_MODE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules TRAFFIC_MODE TRAFFIC_MODE
Traffic mode of the MSC server. 0: load sharing mode (ie the traffic is distributed over all the active IPSPs) 1 :override mode (ie only one of the IPSPs handle the traffic) 2: broadcast mode (ie all the active IPSPs receive the same messages) - The value "broadcast mode" is not allowed. - When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of SCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_ Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC MSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. - The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS. - Parameter change: Before any modification of the TRAFFIC_MODE, If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of the TRAFFIC_MODE, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service. No No
114 / 1278
5 GSM Telecom Parameters
115 / 1278
5.1 Network (CDE)

5.1.1 (ADDR_MON) - (ADDR_MON)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ADDR_MON ADDR_MON
Time it takes to ADDR_TR to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the address error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
No No
116 / 1278
5.1.2 (ADDR_TR) - (ADDR_TR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value ADDR_TR ADDR_TR
Address error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 60
No No
117 / 1278
5.1.3 (Autocleaning_Timer) - (T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Autocleaning_Timer T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP
Guard time for detection of SDCCH/TCH autocleaning procedure. step size = 1 sec - In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30 seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0. - Alcatel-Lucent recommends to configure the present BSS guard timer strictly greater than Max(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS, RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR) x 0.480 sec of any cells of the BSS in order to let the radio link failure defence mechanism ended before internal cleanup. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 40
External Comment
T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP = 0 inhibits the autocleaning procedure. No No
118 / 1278
5.1.4 (BF_HI_RX) - (BF_HI_RX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_HI_RX BF_HI_RX
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from normal to busy condition. BF_HI_RX > BF_LO_RX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
No No
119 / 1278
5.1.5 (BF_HI_TX) - (BF_HI_TX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_HI_TX BF_HI_TX
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from normal to busy condition. BF_HI_TX > BF_LO_TX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 16
No No
120 / 1278
5.1.6 (BF_LO_RX) - (BF_LO_RX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_LO_RX BF_LO_RX
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from busy to normal condition. BF_LO_RX < BF_HI_RX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
No No
121 / 1278
5.1.7 (BF_LO_TX) - (BF_LO_TX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_LO_TX BF_LO_TX
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from busy to normal condition. BF_LO_TX < BF_HI_TX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 8
No No
122 / 1278
5.1.8 (CGI_REQUIRED) - (CGI_REQD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules CGI_REQUIRED CGI_REQD
Controls format of cell identifications sent to the MSC. 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_REQD parameter to 1 provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_REQD parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G to 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any additional Telecom outage. Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
123 / 1278
5.1.9 (COUNT_DECR) - (COUNT_DECR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_DECR COUNT_DECR
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is decremented upon T_COUNT_I expiry. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 1
No No
124 / 1278
5.1.10 (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD) - (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_I_THRESHOLD COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Leaky bucket counter threshold used to trigger defense actions upon TCU overload. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 10
No No
125 / 1278
5.1.11 (COUNT_INCR_1) - (COUNT_INCR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_INCR_1 COUNT_INCR_1
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 1. COUNT_INCR_1 <= COUNT_INCR_2 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
126 / 1278
5.1.12 (COUNT_INCR_2) - (COUNT_INCR_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_INCR_2 COUNT_INCR_2
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 2. COUNT_INCR_2 >= COUNT_INCR_1 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 4
No No
127 / 1278
5.1.13 (CRC_MON) - (CRC_MON)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CRC_MON CRC_MON
Time in which CRC_TR is to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the CRC error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
No No
128 / 1278
5.1.14 (CRC_TR) - (CRC_TR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CRC_TR CRC_TR
CRC error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 50
No No
129 / 1278
5.1.15 (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY) (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Defines if the G1 non-capable MS is supported or not in the network 0: G1 non-capable MS-s are only supported in the cells where the BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM band or on DCS1800 band). 1: G1 non-capable MS-s are not supported in any cell that contains at least one G1 TRX of the network (Note these MS-s are still supported in other cells). When EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY is set to "0", if the BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM band or on DCS1800 band), then: 1) the OMC-R does not allow the operator to define the CCCH, SDCCH and CBCH on a G1 TRX. 2) TRX_PREF_MARK must be <> 0 for a hopping G1 TRX. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
No No
130 / 1278
5.1.16 (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF) - (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
When set, this flag allows, when bugged MS asking for a "dual rate, half-rate preferred", to allocate a full rate channel. 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
131 / 1278
5.1.17 (I_TX_LAPD) - (I_TX_LAPD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value I_TX_LAPD I_TX_LAPD
Maximum LAPD transmission queue length. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 204 Default 105
No No
132 / 1278
5.1.18 (LB_DECR) - (LB_DECR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LB_DECR LB_DECR
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is decremented on T_LB_OV expiry. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 3
No No
133 / 1278
5.1.19 (LB_INCR) - (LB_INCR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LB_INCR LB_INCR
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is incremented each time an OVERLOAD is received from the FU. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
134 / 1278
5.1.20 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1] MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]
Percentage of MEASUREMENT RESULT messages discarded by the TCU at step I. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 10
No No
135 / 1278

No No
136 / 1278

No No
137 / 1278

No No
138 / 1278

No No
139 / 1278

No No
140 / 1278

No No
141 / 1278

No No
142 / 1278

No No
143 / 1278

No No
144 / 1278
5.1.30 (NBLK) - (NBLK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBLK NBLK
Maximum number of BLOCK messages that can be sent if the ACK from the MSC is not received. 255: infinite transmission Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 2
No No
145 / 1278
5.1.31 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Number of steps needed to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 1. NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 <= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 1
No No
146 / 1278
5.1.32 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Number of steps to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 2. NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 >= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
147 / 1278
5.1.33 (NUBLK) - (NUBLK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUBLK NUBLK
Maximum number of UNBLOCK messages that are sent if the ACK from the MSC is not received. 255: infinite transmission Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 2
No No
148 / 1278
5.1.34 (PROT_MON) - (PROT_MON)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PROT_MON PROT_MON
Time in which PROT_TH is to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the protocol error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 10
No No
149 / 1278
5.1.35 (PROT_TH) - (PROT_TH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PROT_TH PROT_TH
Protocol error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
No No
150 / 1278
5.1.36 (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB) - (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB
Maximum number of measured neighbour frequencies, reported by the BTS to the BSC in the Radio Measurements. The actual number, reported by a TRE, depends on its generation. One frequency, identified by one (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couple, is reported into one CI vector. Configuring a multiple of 14 as value allows optimizing the block usage in the RMS measurements returned to OMC in the performance counters. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 42 Maximum 154 Default 84
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. - Significant only if EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC is enabled. - A G3 TRE supports up to 84 (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couples; others up to 154 couples. No No
151 / 1278
5.1.37 (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD) - (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Period used to average the processor occupancy measurements. 8 bits, step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 16 Default 10
No No
152 / 1278
5.1.38 (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY) - (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is high. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
153 / 1278
5.1.39 (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY) - (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_LOW_DELAY SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is low. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 0
No No
154 / 1278
5.1.40 (SMS_INHIBIT) - (SMS_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMS_INHIBIT SMS_INHIBIT
This flag enables/disables SMS support. 0: SMS permitted, 1: SMS inhibited Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
155 / 1278
5.1.41 (SSF) - (SSF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SSF SSF
This parameter inditifies the numbering plan of the Signalling Point Code. coded over 4 bits.only values 0, 4, 8 and 12 are defined : Value = 0, international network; Value = 4, Spare, reserved for international use; Value = 8, National network; Value = 12 , Reserved for national use Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 12 Default 12
Coding rules
External Comment
SSF (Sub-Service Field) is composed of 4 bits: 2bits for Network Indicator and 2 spare bits. No No
156 / 1278
5.1.42 (T_BTS_EST_CNF) - (T_BTS_EST_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BTS_EST_CNF T_BTS_EST_CNF
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Establishment procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 4
No No
157 / 1278
5.1.43 (T_BTS_RLS_CNF) - (T_BTS_RLS_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BTS_RLS_CNF T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 4
No No
158 / 1278
5.1.44 (T_CBC_READY) - (T_CBC_READY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_CBC_READY T_CBC_READY
Defines the maximum period during which the BSC tries to connect to the CBC before issueing an alarm or returning CMD-MODE Resp. step size: 1 sec T_CBC_READY > 8 * T_CONNECT Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 600 Default 300
No No
159 / 1278
5.1.45 (T_COUNT_I) - (T_COUNT_I)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_COUNT_I T_COUNT_I
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 12
No No
160 / 1278
5.1.46 (T_i) - (T_i)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_i T_i
Duration of SSP or SPI condition that triggers an Internal Reset procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 22
External Comment
Some "slow" MSC (e.g. legacy MSC) may take more than one minute to reply the BSC request (e.g. the SST message sent by the BSC). If the BSC is connected to such kind of "slow" MSC, increasing the T_i value up to 120 seconds may be necessary. Otherwise after T_i expiry, the BSC triggers an unexpected Internal Reset procedure. This leads to telecom outage for several minutes. No No
161 / 1278
5.1.47 (T_LB_OV) - (T_LB_OV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LB_OV T_LB_OV
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to FU overload. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
No No
162 / 1278
5.1.48 (T_OVL_MSC) - (T_OVL_MSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_OVL_MSC T_OVL_MSC
Minimum delay between two consecutive OVERLOAD messages sent to the MSC. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 6553.5 Default 20
No No
163 / 1278
5.1.49 (T_RCR_ACK) - (T_RCR_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_RCR_ACK T_RCR_ACK
Supervision of the RF Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 5
No No
164 / 1278
5.1.50 (T_SMSCB_RESP) - (T_SMSCB_RESP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_SMSCB_RESP T_SMSCB_RESP
Maximum waiting time to get a response from the BTS to a primitive. step size = 1 sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
165 / 1278
5.1.51 (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL) - (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
This timer defines the time that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC Shared DTM Information Indication message indicating that the TCH resource allocated to a DTM capable MS is being released at the BSC side, the MFS shall wait before releasing the TCH resource in its turn. step size = 100 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1000
External Comment
The value "0" indicates that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC Shared DTM Information Indication message, the MFS shall release immediately the related TCH resource. No No
166 / 1278
5.1.52 (T1_0858) - (T1_0858)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T1_0858 T1_0858
Delay during which, after reception of an OVERLOAD from the BTS, a new OVERLOAD is ignored. step size = 0.1sec T1_0858 < T2_0858 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6553.5 Default 30
No No
167 / 1278
5.1.53 (T2_0858) - (T2_0858)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T2_0858 T2_0858
Minimum delay between debarring of an access class, in the case where the BTS stops sending OVERLOAD. step size = 0.1sec T2_0858 > T1_0858 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
No No
168 / 1278
5.1.54 (T9101) - (T9101)

Supervision of the SCCP connection release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 10
No No
169 / 1278
5.1.55 (T9103) - (T9103)

Supervision of the Channel Activation procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
No No
170 / 1278
5.1.56 (T9108) - (T9108)

Supervision of the Physical Context procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
No No
171 / 1278
5.1.57 (T9110) - (T9110)

Guards the response of the MSC when no resources are allocated to the SCCP connection (started on the reception of CONN_IND(SCCP_CON_REQ) not carrying a HANDOVER REQUEST message and stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST message is received on the same SCCP connection as the SCCP_CON_REQ message). Guards also the response of the MSC when a HANDOVER FAILURE or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message has been sent (stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST or CLEAR COMMAND message is received). step size = 0.1sec T9110 << max [T(ias), T(iar)]. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 20
No No
172 / 1278
5.1.58 (TCH_INFO_PERIOD) - (TCH_INFO_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TCH_INFO_PERIOD TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Periodicity of TCH usage information update in the BSC. stepsize = 0.1 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 25.5 Default 5
No No
173 / 1278
5.1.59 (THR_LB_OV) - (THR_LB_OV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_LB_OV THR_LB_OV
Counter threshold for triggering global defence actions in the BSC upon FU overload. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 10
No No
174 / 1278
5.1.60 (THRESHOLD_1_0) - (THRESHOLD_1_0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESHOLD_1_0 THRESHOLD_1_0
Free buffer thresholds separating "no overload" condition and "overload level 1" condition when pointer P points at position 0. THRESHOLD_1_0 >= THRESHOLD_2_0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 25
No No
175 / 1278

No No
176 / 1278

No No
177 / 1278

No No
178 / 1278

No No
179 / 1278

No No
180 / 1278

No No
181 / 1278

No No
182 / 1278

No No
183 / 1278

No No
184 / 1278

No No
185 / 1278

Free buffer thresholds separating "overload level 1" condition and "overload level 2" condition when pointer P points at position 0. THRESHOLD_2_0 <= THRESHOLD_1_0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 22
No No
186 / 1278

No No
187 / 1278

No No
188 / 1278

No No
189 / 1278

No No
190 / 1278

No No
191 / 1278

No No
192 / 1278

No No
193 / 1278

No No
194 / 1278

No No
195 / 1278

No No
196 / 1278
5.1.82 (TL_TCUA) - (TL_TCUA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TL_TCUA TL_TCUA
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load increaseby the local overload controller. step size = 0.1sec TL_TCUA >TS_TCUA Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 50 Default 20
No No
197 / 1278
5.1.83 (TL0) - (TL0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TL0 TL0
Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Low Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal to TL0 and less than TL3." The TCU is in "No Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is less than TL0. TL0 < TL3 < TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
No No
198 / 1278
5.1.84 (TL1) - (TL1)

BSC processor occupancy threshold used to decrement pointer P on buffer occupancy thresholds. TL1 < TL2 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
No No
199 / 1278
5.1.85 (TL2) - (TL2)

BSC processor occupancy threshold used to increment pointer P on buffer occupancy thresholds. TL3 > TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 85
No No
200 / 1278
5.1.86 (TL3) - (TL3)

Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level: 1) In upward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "High Overload" state if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4"; 2) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is still in "Very High Overload" State if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4"; 3) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "Low Overload" state if "TL0 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL3. T0 < TL3 < TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 75
No No
201 / 1278
5.1.87 (TL4) - (TL4)

Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Very High Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal to TL4. TL4 > TL3 > TL0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 95
No No
202 / 1278
5.1.88 (TRG_SDCCH) - (TRG_SDCCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRG_SDCCH TRG_SDCCH
Controls if local overload controller is triggered upon SDCCH overload. 1 for TCU, 0 for others Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC proc Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
This parameter is set by default to 1 for TCUs. It shall be set to 0 for other BSC processors No No
203 / 1278
5.1.89 (TS_TCUA) - (TS_TCUA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TS_TCUA TS_TCUA
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load reduction by the local overload controller. step size = 0.1sec TS_TCUA < TL_TCUA Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 50 Default 10
No No
204 / 1278
5.2 Site (CAE)

5.2.1 (A_LEV_HO) - (A_LEV_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_HO A_LEV_HO
Window size for level averages for handover. A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32 A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC. A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
205 / 1278
5.2.2 (A_LEV_MCHO) - (A_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_MCHO A_LEV_MCHO
Window size for level averages for microcell handover. A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 2
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
206 / 1278
5.2.3 (A_LEV_PC) - (A_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_PC A_LEV_PC
Window size for level averages for power control. A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32 A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 4
No No
207 / 1278
5.2.4 (A_PBGT_DR) - (A_PBGT_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_PBGT_DR A_PBGT_DR
Window size for neighbour cell level averages for forced directed retry. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 4
No No
208 / 1278
5.2.5 (A_PBGT_HO) - (A_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition A_PBGT_HO A_PBGT_HO
Window size for averaging neighbour cell levels and averaging current cell levels for power budget calculation. A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32 A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 16
External Comment
should be set to 6 in suburban area, to 8 in urban area and to 12 in rural area Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 12 12 12 12 6 12 12 12
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
209 / 1278
5.2.6 (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR) - (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channel adaptation (handover Cause 27). step size = 1 Samfr A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 61 Default 61
No No
210 / 1278
5.2.7 (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR) - (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation. step size = 1 Samfr A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 61 Default 8
No No
211 / 1278
5.2.8 (A_QUAL_HO) - (A_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_HO A_QUAL_HO
Window size for quality averages for handover. A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32 A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
212 / 1278
5.2.9 (A_QUAL_PC) - (A_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_PC A_QUAL_PC
Window size for quality averages for power control. A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32 A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 4
No No
213 / 1278
5.2.10 (A_RANGE_HO) - (A_RANGE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_RANGE_HO A_RANGE_HO
Window size for distance averages. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
No No
214 / 1278
5.2.11 (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_TRAFFIC_LOAD A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Window size for load averages. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 12
No
Nb of TRX Dependent t01 4 t02 4 t03 8 t04 8 t05 12 t06 12 t07 12 t08 12 t09 12 t010 12 t011 12 t012 12
215 / 1278
5.2.12 (AC 0) - (AC_0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AC 0 AC_0
Indicates if Access Class 0 is barred. 0: not barred, 1: barred Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
216 / 1278
5.2.13 (AC 1) - (AC_1)

No No
217 / 1278
5.2.14 (AC 11) - (AC_11)

No No
218 / 1278
5.2.15 (AC 12) - (AC_12)

No No
219 / 1278
5.2.16 (AC 13) - (AC_13)

No No
220 / 1278
5.2.17 (AC 14) - (AC_14)

No No
221 / 1278
5.2.18 (AC 15) - (AC_15)

No No
222 / 1278
5.2.19 (AC 2) - (AC_2)

No No
223 / 1278
5.2.20 (AC 3) - (AC_3)

No No
224 / 1278
5.2.21 (AC 4) - (AC_4)

No No
225 / 1278
5.2.22 (AC 5) - (AC_5)

No No
226 / 1278
5.2.23 (AC 6) - (AC_6)

No No
227 / 1278
5.2.24 (AC 7) - (AC_7)

No No
228 / 1278
5.2.25 (AC 8) - (AC_8)

No No
229 / 1278
5.2.26 (AC 9) - (AC_9)

No No
230 / 1278
5.2.27 (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST) - (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
Enables/disables the addition of the legacy HR codec type in the list of supported codec type provided to the TFO remote partner for a given AMR-NB call, when that call is currently established in Half Rate for cell load reason and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO on AMR-NB supported by the TC and configured in the cell). 0: HR SV1 is never provided in the list of supported codec types. 1: HR SV1 may be provided (if supported by the MS and configured in the cell) in the list of supported codec types, in addition to HR SV3. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- Significant if EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled - TFO on AMR-NB function is available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted. Change applied only on new AMR-NB call allocated in Half Rate after modification No No
231 / 1278
5.2.28 (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM) (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Indicates if C2 cell selection parameters are present in SYS_INFO_7&8 or SYS_INFO_4. 1bit; 0= the SI 4 rest octets, if present, are used to derive the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters. 1= the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters in a SYS INFO TYPE or message 8 are used Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
232 / 1278
5.2.29 (AG_PREMPT_PCH) - (AG_PREMPT_PCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AG_PREMPT_PCH AG_PREMPT_PCH
Flag to enable pre-emption of Paging sub-channels for Access Grant messages when there is one remaining free AGCH block. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled Lets define the free AGCH blocks as the number of blocks remaining for the AGCH messages when the BCCH extended block and NCH blocks have been excluded. - If there is no free AGCH block then the flag is not used (pre-emption mandatory, default value 0 is not used by BTS ) - If there is only one free AGCH block then AG_PREMPT_PCH =1 or 0 (pre-emption allowed) - If there is more than one free AGCH then AG_PREMPT_PCH = 0 (pre-emption forbidden). Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
233 / 1278
5.2.30 (ALLOC_ANYWAY) - (ALLOC_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ALLOC_ANYWAY ALLOC_ANYWAY
Controls whether a queued request can be allocated on free resource at expiry of its queuing timer independently of the threshold NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
only relevant when NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0 No No
234 / 1278
5.2.31 (AMR_FR_HYST) - (AMR_FR_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules AMR_FR_HYST AMR_FR_HYST
Hysteresis for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3). The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is: AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 2 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE. No No
235 / 1278
5.2.32 (AMR_FR_SUBSET) - (AMR_FR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_FR_SUBSET AMR_FR_SUBSET
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for AMR-NB FR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration). bit 8 (most significant)=1: 12,2 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 7=1: 10,2 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 6=1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset. AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.40, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 2 is composed of the codec: 5.90 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 3 is composed of the codec: 6.70 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 4 is composed of the codec: 7.40 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 5 is composed of the codec: 7.95 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 6 is composed of the codec: 10.20 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 7 is composed of the codec: 12.20 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 10 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 12 is composed of the codec: 10.20, 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 14 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.95, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec (The list of all the 16 standardized AMR-NB FR configurations are given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1). The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS
Recommended rules
Category Type SubSystem Instance
236 / 1278
Value
Unit None
Minimum 1
Maximum 240
Default 164
External Comment
- Default value corresponds to an optimal codec subset:12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s - The AMR-NB FR configurations 11, 13 and 15 (allowing the optimization mode) are not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS. No No
237 / 1278
5.2.33 (AMR_FR_THR_1) - (AMR_FR_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_FR_THR_1 AMR_FR_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_1 <= AMR_FR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_1 <= 16dB. The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is: AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 4 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 6.5
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). AMR_FR_THR_1 is not used if less than 2 codecs are in the AMR FR subset. Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE. No No
238 / 1278

Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 >= AMR_FR_THR_1 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_2 <= 16dB. The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are: AMR configuration 1 and 14: 6.5 dB; AMR configuration 9, 10 and 12: 5.5 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11.5
External Comment
239 / 1278

Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between third lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_3 <= 16dB. The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are: AMR configuration 1 and 14: 11.5 dB; AMR configuration 10: 6.5 dB; AMR configuration 12: 8 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11.5
External Comment
240 / 1278
5.2.36 (AMR_HR_HYST) - (AMR_HR_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules AMR_HR_HYST AMR_HR_HYST
Hysteresis for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3). The recommended value for the preferred AMR HR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is: AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10: 2 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE. No No
241 / 1278
5.2.37 (AMR_HR_SUBSET) - (AMR_HR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_HR_SUBSET AMR_HR_SUBSET
Bitmap (6 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for AMR-NB HR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration). Coded on 1 byte. bit 8 (most significant) = 0 bit 7 = 0; bit 6 =1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset; AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 2 is composed of the codec: 5.90 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 3 is composed of the codec: 6.70 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec AMR configuration 10 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75 Kbit/sec (The list of all the 9 standardized AMR-NB HR configurations are given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1). - The subset shall not contain only 7.4 kbit/s codec mode. As consequence, the AMR configuration 4 is forbidden too. The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 60 Default 22
Recommended rules
242 / 1278
External Comment
- Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). - The codec mode 7.95 kbit/s (and AMR configuration 5, as consequence) is not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS. No No
243 / 1278
5.2.38 (AMR_HR_THR_1) - (AMR_HR_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_HR_THR_1 AMR_HR_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_1 <= AMR_HR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_1 <= 16dB. The recommended values for the preferred AMR HR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter are: AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 10.5 dB; AMR configuration 8: 11 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). AMR_HR_THR_1 is not used if less than 2 codecs are in the AMR HR subset. Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE. No No
244 / 1278

Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 >= AMR_HR_THR_1 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_2 <= 16dB. The recommended value for the preferred AMR HR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is: AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 12 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 12.5
External Comment
245 / 1278

Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between third lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_3 <= 16dB. The recommended value for the preferred AMR HR configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is: AMR configuration 10: 13 dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 12.5
External Comment
246 / 1278
5.2.41 (AMR_START_MODE_FR) - (AMR_START_MODE_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_START_MODE_FR AMR_START_MODE_FR
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB FR call, until codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS. 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes) Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode. No No
247 / 1278
5.2.42 (AMR_START_MODE_HR) - (AMR_START_MODE_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_START_MODE_HR AMR_START_MODE_HR
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB HR call, until codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS. 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes) If AMR_START_MODE_HR is explicit (I.e. not equal to 0), the chosen codec mode shall not correspond to 7.40 kbit/s. Use codec mode 6.7 kbit/s as start mode for AMR-NB HR should be avoided. Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
External Comment
When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode. No No
248 / 1278
5.2.43 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 +AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 +AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2.5
Recommended rules
No No
249 / 1278
5.2.44 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition between highest codec mode and second lowest codec mode step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 +AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 +AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2.5
Recommended rules
No No
250 / 1278
5.2.45 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 <= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 6
Recommended rules
No No
251 / 1278
5.2.46 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and highest codec mode step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 63 = 31.5 dB - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 <= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 8
Recommended rules
No No
252 / 1278
5.2.47 (AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD) - (EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR
This flag enables/disables access class automatic barring upon BTS/BSC overload. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
253 / 1278
5.2.48 (AUTO_BAR_CELL) - (AUT_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AUTO_BAR_CELL AUT_BAR
This flag enables/inhibits automatic barring of cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
254 / 1278
5.2.49 (AUTO_BAR_EC) - (EC_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AUTO_BAR_EC EC_BAR
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of Emergency Class. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
255 / 1278
5.2.50 (Automatic AC barring on TCH load) - (EN_LOAD_MNGT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Automatic AC barring on TCH load EN_LOAD_MNGT
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of access classes on TCH load criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
256 / 1278
5.2.51 (B_NUM) - (B_NUM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value B_NUM B_NUM
Number of BLOCK/UNBLOCK messages sent in one burst. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 35 Default 5
Default value depends on MSC type. No No
257 / 1278
5.2.52 (BCC) - (BCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (BSC)
BTS colour code of the cell. coded over 3 bits Equal to BCC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
258 / 1278
5.2.53 (BCC) - (BCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (MFS)
BTS colour code of the cell. coded over 3 bits Equal to BCC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
259 / 1278
5.2.54 (BCC) - (BCC (n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (n)
BTS colour code of the adjacent cell. coded over 3 bits Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
260 / 1278
5.2.55 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BCCH_ARFCN BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC)
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell. The coded default value of -1 is for implementation purposes only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any BCCH yet. - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS) For Evolium serving cell: - there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection) . - if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for handover. - if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G, then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
No No
261 / 1278
5.2.56 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BCCH_ARFCN BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell. - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS) For Evolium serving cell: - there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection) . - if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for handover. - if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G, then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for handover.
Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
No No
262 / 1278
5.2.57 (BCCH_EXT) - (BCCH_EXT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules BCCH_EXT BCCH_EXT
This flag enables / disables the use of extended BCCH. 0: false, 1:true -When EN_SOLSA is enabled, the BCCH_EXT shall be set to true. -When EN_VGCS is disabled : . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1 -When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY recommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequency bands and at least 18 adjacent BCCH within the same band. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
No No
263 / 1278
5.2.58 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC)
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel (AGCH). coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7) -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given cell -when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell, BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0 - when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell. -When EN_VGCS is disabled : . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1 -When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
External Comment
- Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0 - For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1 - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed). No No
264 / 1278
5.2.59 (BS_P_CON_ACK) - (BS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BS_P_CON_ACK BS_P_CON_ACK
Supervision of the BS Power Control procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
265 / 1278
5.2.60 (BS_P_CON_INT) - (BS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BS_P_CON_INT BS_P_CON_INT
Minimum delay between two consecutive BS power commands. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
266 / 1278
5.2.61 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PA_MFRMS BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC)
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences of a Paging Group. coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9) BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 9 Default 5
External Comment
The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption is. No No
267 / 1278
5.2.62 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION) - (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION
This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB, applied on the output power (after leveling). In a concentric or multi-band cell, this attenuation applies on the output power of the TRX(s) of the outer zone. step size = 0.1dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.9 Default 0
No No
268 / 1278
5.2.63 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER) (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB, applied on the output power of the TRX(s) of the inner zone in a concentric or multi-band cell (after leveling). step size = 0.1dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.9 Default 0
External Comment
The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
269 / 1278
5.2.64 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS. It is always set to 0 by the OMC. A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
External Comment
The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation). No No
270 / 1278
5.2.65 (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the TRX of the inner zone in a concentric or multi-band cell. It is always set to 0 by the OMC. A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER defined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
External Comment
The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation). The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes.
271 / 1278
Cell Type Dependent
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell
N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
272 / 1278
5.2.66 (BS_TXPWR_MIN) - (BS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MIN BS_TXPWR_MIN
This parameter defines the maximum value of the power attenuation (so the minimum allowed transmission power) relative to the attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default -24
No No
273 / 1278
5.2.67 (BSC Primary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Primary X25 Address BSC_X25_primary_address
BSC X25 primary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference OMC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default *
External Comment
The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for implementation purposes. No No
274 / 1278
5.2.68 (BSC Primary X25 Address [1]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Primary X25 Address [1] BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1]
First character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
275 / 1278

Tenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
276 / 1278

Eleventh character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
277 / 1278

Twelfth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
278 / 1278

Thirteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
279 / 1278

Fourteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
280 / 1278

Fifteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
281 / 1278

Second character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
282 / 1278

Third character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
283 / 1278

Fourth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
284 / 1278

Fifth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
285 / 1278

Sixth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
286 / 1278

Seventh character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
287 / 1278

Eighth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
288 / 1278

Ninth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
289 / 1278
5.2.83 (BSC Secondary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Secondary X25 Address BSC_X25_secondary_address
BSC X25 secondary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference OMC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default *
External Comment
290 / 1278
5.2.84 (BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]) (BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Secondary X25 Address [1] BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1]
First character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
291 / 1278

Tenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
292 / 1278

Eleventh character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
293 / 1278

Twelfth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
294 / 1278

Thirteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
295 / 1278

Fourteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
296 / 1278

Fifteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
297 / 1278

Second character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
298 / 1278

Third character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
299 / 1278

Fourth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
300 / 1278

Fifth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
301 / 1278

Sixth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
302 / 1278

Seventh character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
303 / 1278

Eighth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
304 / 1278

Ninth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
External Comment
305 / 1278
5.2.99 (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND) - (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Enables/disables the RF RESOURCE INDICATION processing by the BSC. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
306 / 1278
5.2.100 (BSIC) - (BSIC (GSM))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSIC BSIC (GSM)
Concatenation of the NCC and the BCC. Site (CAE) Abstract BSC cell Unit None Minimum # Maximum # Default #
No No
307 / 1278
5.2.101 (BTS_Queue_Length) - (BTS_Q_LENGTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BTS_Queue_Length BTS_Q_LENGTH
Maximum number of Assignment Requests and Handover Requests that can be queued simultaneously. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 3
No
308 / 1278
5.2.102 (CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT) - (RE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT RE
This flag indicates to the MS if call reestablishment is allowed in the cell. 0: allowed, 1: not allowed Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
309 / 1278
5.2.103 (Call_User_Data_Selector) - (Call_user_data_sel)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Call_User_Data_Selector Call_user_data_sel
Identifies the higher protocol selector for an outgoing connection. 0 to 16 bytes string Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. Each byte of the string can get a value in the range [0..255]. No No
310 / 1278
5.2.104 (Candidate cell priority) - (PRIORITY(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Candidate cell priority PRIORITY(0,n)
Priority of the cell n in the HO candidate cell evaluation process. 0: highest priority, 5: lowest priority Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 0
No No
311 / 1278
5.2.105 (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving cell to trigger a "general capture" handover. 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
No No
312 / 1278
5.2.106 (CBC Primary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CBC Primary X25 Address CBC_X25_primary_address
CBC X25 primary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
External Comment
313 / 1278
5.2.107 (CBC Secondary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CBC Secondary X25 Address CBC_X25_secondary_address
CBC X25 secondary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
External Comment
314 / 1278
5.2.108 (CBC_Operator) - (Operator)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules CBC_Operator Operator
Identifies the CBC operator. 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the OMC on the OMC/BSC interface . BSC performs the padding of OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space characters from the retrieved BSC value. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
External Comment
315 / 1278
5.2.109 (CBC_Password) - (Password)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules CBC password. 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the OMC on the OMC/BSC interface. BSC performs the padding of OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space characters from the retrieved BSC value. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None External Comment Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32 CBC_Password Password
316 / 1278
5.2.110 (CBC_Window) - (CBC_window)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CBC_Window CBC_window
Maximum number of outstanding primitives on the BSC/CBC interface for both incoming and outgoing primitives. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled shall be set to "1" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
External Comment
Default value corresponds to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1. If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, CBC_Window should be set to 3. No No
317 / 1278
5.2.111 (CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD) - (RACHRT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD RACHRT
Minimum delay between two consecutive sendings of CCCH LOAD INDICATION messages. step size=1 (51mfr) RACHRT > RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 51mfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 255
No No
318 / 1278
5.2.112 (CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD) - (RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Period over which CCCH load measurements are made. step size=1 RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER < RACHRT Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 51mfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 32
No No
319 / 1278
5.2.113 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell Type Cell_Type
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE, CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an OMC own cell. Used for cell default parameter template. Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7), Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor Concentric(11) - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer". A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable). - The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. Site (CAE) Abstract OMC cell Unit None Minimum * Maximum * Default #
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
*: possible values are: - Single - Umbrella - Umbrella Concentric - Micro - Mini - Micro Concentric - Mini Concentric - Indoor - Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI) - Extended Inner - Extended Outer No No
320 / 1278
5.2.114 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell Type Cell_Type(n)
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE, CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an adjacent cell (OMC own cell or OMC external cell). Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7), Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor Concentric(11), GAN(12) - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer". A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable). - The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. - The "GAN" value is allowed only for external cells Site (CAE) Abstract OMC cell Unit None Minimum * Maximum * Default #
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
*: possible values are: - Single - Umbrella - Umbrella Concentric - Micro - Mini - Micro Concentric - Mini Concentric - Indoor - Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI) - Extended Inner - Extended Outer - GAN No No
321 / 1278
5.2.115 (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY) - (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CELL_BAR_QUALIFY CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Indicates the priority of the cell for cell selection. 0: normal priority, 1: low priority Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
322 / 1278
5.2.116 (CELL_CIPH_SET) - (CELL_CIPH_SET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_CIPH_SET CELL_CIPH_SET
List of flag indicating what are the ciphering algorithms allowed by the operator (each bit represents an A5 algorithm). When several algorithms can be selected (depending on network configuration, MS capabilities and operator choice), the one with the highest A5 number is used. Coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if corresponding encryption algorithm is permitted. Bit x=0 : algorithm A5/x not permitted Bit x=1 : algorithm A5/x permitted bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering) bit 1 : A5/1. bit 2 : A5/2 bit 3 : A5/3 bit 4 : A5/4 ... bit 7 : A5/7.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
The possible values are : - A5/0 - A5/0 + A5/1 - A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3 - The value A5/0 + A5/3 is not allowed because today not all mobiles support A5/3. - If CELL_CIPH_SET does not allow the A5/3 usage in the cell, then EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY cannot be enabled.
Site (CAE) Bitmap BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 1
External Comment
A5/2 is not supported by the BSS. In cells where EN_DTM = enabled, the algorithm A5/3 is not used for MS, DTM capable but not supporting ciphering changes in DTM mode.
323 / 1278
No No
324 / 1278
5.2.117 (CELL_EVALUATION) - (CELL_EV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CELL_EVALUATION CELL_EV
Handover cell evaluation process applied in the cell. 0: Order, 1: Grade Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell grade (1) grade (1) grade (1) grade (1) order (0) grade (1) grade (1) grade (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
325 / 1278
5.2.118 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a different location area or, for a GPRS MS, in a different routing area, or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 6
External Comment
If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the provisioning context of the OMC. No No
326 / 1278
5.2.119 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
No No
327 / 1278
5.2.120 (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND) (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Indicates to the MS if parameters for C2 reselection criterion are broadcast. 0: not present, 1: present Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
328 / 1278
5.2.121 (CI) - (CI (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Cell Identity. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Equal to CI (MFS) Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None External Comment Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535 CI CI (BSC)
329 / 1278
5.2.122 (CI) - (CI(n) (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CI CI(n) (BSC)
Cell Identity of adjacent cell. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Equal to CI(n)(MFS) Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
330 / 1278
5.2.123 (CI_SI) - (CI_SI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CI_SI CI_SI
Specific Cell Identity to be broadcasted in the SI3 and SI6 messages instead of the value of the other O&M parameter "CI". When set to "0", it indicates that the feature is de-activated, i.e the existing CI is sent in SI3 and SI6 messages Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI3 messages and in dedicated SI6 messages of the current calls. No No
331 / 1278
5.2.124 (Circuit Identity Code) - (CIC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Circuit Identity Code CIC
Circuit Identity Code of an A interface circuit. Coded over 16 bits: top 11 bits = pcm number, remaining 5 bits = TS number Site (CAE) Reference BSC A ch Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
332 / 1278
5.2.125 (DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_DEC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
Correction factor favouring handover cause "Power budget" when traffic is high in the serving cell and low in neighbour cell(s). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 24 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 4 dB (4) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
333 / 1278
5.2.126 (DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_INC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN DELTA_INC_HO_margin
Correction factor penalizing handover cause "Power budget" when traffic is low in the serving cell and high in neighbour cell(s). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 24 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 4 dB (4) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
334 / 1278
5.2.127 (Directed_Retry) - (EN_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Directed_Retry EN_DR
This flag enables/disables the execution of Directed Retry. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
335 / 1278
5.2.128 (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-WB GMSK speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK enabled - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1 - If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
336 / 1278
5.2.129 (Downlink DTX) - (DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Downlink DTX DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE
This flag defines if downlink DTX is allowed for FR and EFR calls. 0: DTX not allowed, 1: DTX allowed - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1 - If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
337 / 1278
5.2.130 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB FR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR FR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR FR enabled - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1 - If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
338 / 1278
5.2.131 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB HR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR HR enabled - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1 - If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
339 / 1278
5.2.132 (DOWNLINK_DTX_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_HR Downlink_DTX_enable_HR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for HR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for HR enabled - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1 - If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
340 / 1278
5.2.133 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_FR_INDICATOR DTX_INDICATOR_FR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM Phase 1 and 2 for FR. Applies for all codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB. 0: MS May Use DTX for FR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for FR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for FR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR): may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not. The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Enumerated OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
341 / 1278
5.2.134 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for AMR-NB FR. 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB FR, 1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB FR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB FR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR): may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not. The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may. The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1 Site (CAE) Enumerated OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
342 / 1278
5.2.135 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_HR_INDICATOR DTX_INDICATOR_HR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 for HR. Applies for all codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB. 0: MS May Use DTX for HR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for HR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for HR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR): may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not. The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Enumerated OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
343 / 1278
5.2.136 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for AMR-NB HR. 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB HR, 1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB HR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB HR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR): may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not. The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may. The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1 Site (CAE) Enumerated OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
344 / 1278
5.2.137 (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK) (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only to AMR-WB GMSK. 0= the MS may use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK, 1= the MS shall use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK, 2=the MS shall not use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1 Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
No No
345 / 1278
5.2.138 (DWELL_TIME_STEP) - (DWELL_TIME_STEP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DWELL_TIME_STEP DWELL_TIME_STEP
Step value for the modification (increasing or decreasing) of MIN_DWELL_TIME. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 2
No No
346 / 1278
5.2.139 (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE) - (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
This parameter determines the cause filled in ASSIGNMENT FAILURE sent in case of External Directed Retry. coded over 8 bits Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 13
Default value depends on MSC type No No
347 / 1278
5.2.140 (EDR_MSG_ORDER) - (EDR_MSG_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_MSG_ORDER EDR_MSG_ORDER
This parameter determines the order of transmission of ASSIGNMENT FAILURE and HANDOVER REQUIRED on the A interface in case of an External Directed Retry. 0: Ass Failure before HO Reqd, 1: Ass Failure after HO Reqd Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
348 / 1278
5.2.141 (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED) - (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
This flag indicates whether or not Assignment Request is maintained in queue during External Directed Retry attempt. 0: Request not maintained in queue, 1: Request maintained in queue Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
349 / 1278
5.2.142 (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL) - (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
This flag indicates whether ASSIGNMENT FAILURE is sent to the MSC in case of External Directed Retry. 0: Assignment Failure not sent, 1: Assignment Failure sent Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
350 / 1278
5.2.143 (EFR_ENABLED) - (EFR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EFR_ENABLED EFR_ENABLED
This flag indicates whether the operation of enhanced full rate (EFR) is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
351 / 1278
5.2.144 (EMERGENCY_CALL) - (EC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EMERGENCY_CALL EC
Indicates if Emergency calls are allowed for all access classes or only for access classes 11 to 15. 0: all access classes, 1: access classes 11 to 15 only Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
352 / 1278
5.2.145 (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU) - (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Defines if the limitation of TRE is static or dynamic. For static limitation only Nb FR TRE + 2 x DR TRE < 200 is allowed. For dynamic limitation only Nb TRE < 200 is allowed. 0: static 1:dynamic Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
353 / 1278
5.2.146 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR) - (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27). According to the load of the serving cell (high or normal), the handover is triggered with different thresholds values. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND EN_AMR_HR=1} Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 27 triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason). - When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled, then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically inhibited. No No
354 / 1278
5.2.147 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED) (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27) under high load only. 0: disabled 1: enabled EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED can be enabled only if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR =1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled, then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically inhibited (even if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR is enabled). No No
355 / 1278
5.2.148 (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR) - (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channel adaptation (Handover Cause 26). 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND EN_AMR_HR=1} Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 26 triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason). No No
356 / 1278
5.2.149 (EN_AMR_FR) - (EN_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_FR EN_AMR_FR
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB full rate is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
357 / 1278
5.2.150 (EN_AMR_HR) - (EN_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_HR EN_AMR_HR
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB half rate is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
358 / 1278
5.2.151 (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag controls whether or not AMR-WB GMSK is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
359 / 1278
5.2.152 (EN_BALANCED_CI) - (EN_BALANCED_CI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_BALANCED_CI EN_BALANCED_CI
This flag enables/disables to balance the C/I measure. 0:disable, 1: enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
360 / 1278
5.2.153 (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO) - (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "too high level in outer zone" handover cause (cause 13). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A enable (1) enable (1) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
361 / 1278
5.2.154 (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)) - (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BI-BAND_MS(n) EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
This flag enables/disables the incoming handovers of bi-band MSs from the preferred band. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
362 / 1278
5.2.155 (EN_BS_PC) - (EN_BS_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_BS_PC EN_BS_PC
This flag enables/disables BS Power Control. 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
363 / 1278
5.2.156 (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP) - (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
This flag enables/disables the sending of Circuit group messages. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
364 / 1278
5.2.157 (EN_DIST_HO) - (EN_DIST_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_DIST_HO EN_DIST_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "distance" handover cause (cause 6). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) disable (0) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
365 / 1278
5.2.158 (EN_EDR) - (EN_EXT_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EDR EN_EXT_DR
This flag enables/disables the Outgoing External Directed Retry procedure. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is set to enable. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EDR is enabled in order to get a Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested and thus to attempt other procedures. No No
366 / 1278
5.2.159 (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP) - (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EXT_MEAS_REP EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
This flag enables/disables the extended measurement reporting for Mobile Assisted Frequency Allocation. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
367 / 1278
5.2.160 (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
This flag enables/disables the use of Fast traffic handovers. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
368 / 1278
5.2.161 (EN_FORCED_DR) - (EN_FORCED_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FORCED_DR EN_FORCED_DR
This flag enables/disables the "Forced Directed Retry" handover cause detection. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
369 / 1278
5.2.162 (EN_GAN_HO) - (EN_GAN_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_GAN_HO EN_GAN_HO
This flag enables/disables the handover to GAN 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
370 / 1278
5.2.163 (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO) - (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "general capture" handover cause (cause 24). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
371 / 1278
5.2.164 (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK
Enables/disables, when the cell is loaded, the support of the Half Rate allocation (at new call establishment and during inter-cell handover) for possible AMR-WB calls. This feature deals with the possible AMR-WB calls, ie calls for which AMR-WB is supported by the MS, and supported by the TC, and allowed by the MSC, and allowed in the cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- Significant if EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is enabled - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, calls on going in the cell are not disrupted. Change applied only on new calls (establishment or handover) allocated in the cell after modification. No No
372 / 1278
5.2.165 (EN_HSL) - (EN_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_HSL EN_HSL
Enables SS7 HSL (High speed Signalling Link). 0: HSL disabled 1: HSL enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Changeable on the BSC terminal. if EN_HSL = 1 the following new Q703 parameters: Q703_N1_HSL, Q_703_N2_HSL, Q703_T1_HSL, Q703_T4E_HSL and Q703_T4N_HSL replaces the old ones: Q703_N1, Q_703_N2, Q703_T1, Q703_T4E and Q703_T4N. No No
373 / 1278
5.2.166 (EN_IMM_ASS_REJ) - (EN_IM_ASS_REJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_IMM_ASS_REJ EN_IM_ASS_REJ
This flag indicates if the Immediate Assignment Reject procedure is enabled. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
This parameter is only valid for circuit switched traffic. For packet traffic (GPRS or EGPRS) sending of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages cannot be disabled. No No
374 / 1278
5.2.167 (EN_INCOMING_HO) - (EN_IC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INCOMING_HO EN_IC_HO
This flag enables/disables incoming handovers in the cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
375 / 1278
5.2.168 (EN_INTERBAND_HO) - (EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTERBAND_HO EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH
This flag enables / disables the multiband operation by filtering the sending of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 2ter/5ter. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
376 / 1278
5.2.169 (EN_INTRA_DL) - (EN_INTRA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL EN_INTRA_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
377 / 1278
5.2.170 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL_AMR EN_INTRA_DL_AMR
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-NB calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
378 / 1278
5.2.171 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-WB GMSK calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
379 / 1278
5.2.172 (EN_INTRA_UL) - (EN_INTRA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL EN_INTRA_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
380 / 1278
5.2.173 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL_AMR EN_INTRA_UL_AMR
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for AMR-NB calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
381 / 1278
5.2.174 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for AMR-WB GMSK calls 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
382 / 1278
5.2.175 (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED) - (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
This flag enables/disables the repetition of intracell handover attempts. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
383 / 1278
5.2.176 (EN_LOAD_BALANCE) - (EN_LOAD_BALANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_LOAD_BALANCE EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Flag to enable/disable the balancing of load between the inner and outer zone of a multiband cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both "Enabled". Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
EN_LOAD_BALANCE significant only if EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO is enabled Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A disable (0) disable (0) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
384 / 1278
5.2.177 (EN_LOAD_ORDER) - (EN_LOAD_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_LOAD_ORDER EN_LOAD_ORDER
This flag indicates whether or not traffic load has to be taken into account when setting up the list of target cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
385 / 1278
5.2.178 (EN_MA_SELECTION) - (EN_MA_SELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MA_SELECTION EN_MA_SELECTION
This flag enables/disables channel selection according to Mobile Allocation criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
386 / 1278
5.2.179 (EN_MCHO_H_DL) - (EN_MCHO_H_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_H_DL EN_MCHO_H_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink micro-cell" handover cause (cause 18). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
387 / 1278
5.2.180 (EN_MCHO_H_UL) - (EN_MCHO_H_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_H_UL EN_MCHO_H_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink mirco-cell " handover cause (cause 17). 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
388 / 1278
5.2.181 (EN_MCHO_NCELL) - (EN_MCHO_NCELL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_NCELL EN_MCHO_NCELL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "high level in neighbour lower or indoor cell" handover cause (cause 14). 0: disabled, 1: enabled In a lower layer cell, the flag shall be disabled if there is no indoor layer. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
389 / 1278
5.2.182 (EN_MCHO_RESCUE) - (EN_MCHO_RESCUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_RESCUE EN_MCHO_RESCUE
This flag enables/disables the detection of "consecutive bad SACCH frames" handover cause (cause 7). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
390 / 1278
5.2.183 (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC) - (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC
Enables/disables the "RMS improvement" feature, which allows reporting more than 42 neighbour frequencies per TRX in the 2G radio link measurements performed by the MS. When enabled, the parameter RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB gives the maximum number of frequencies reported by the BTS. When disabled, that maximum is not configurable (42, per default). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
-Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. -Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted. But the RMS jobs, ongoing on the BTSs, are restarted (all data already collected are discarded). No No
391 / 1278
5.2.184 (EN_MS_PC) - (EN_MS_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MS_PC EN_MS_PC
This flag enables/disables MS Power Control. 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
392 / 1278
5.2.185 (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO) - (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
This flag enables/disables the power budget handovers Cause 12 and the traffic handovers Cause 23 between cells belonging to different frequency bands. 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
393 / 1278
5.2.186 (EN_PBGT_FILTERING) - (EN_PBGT_FILTERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PBGT_FILTERING EN_PBGT_FILTERING
This flag enables/disables filtering of candidate neighbour cells on HO_MARGIN_DIST/LEV/QUAL criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled This parameter must be set to disabled in case of extended cell Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) disable (0) enable (1) disable (0) disable (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
394 / 1278
5.2.187 (EN_PBGT_HO) - (EN_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PBGT_HO EN_PBGT_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "power budget" handover cause (cause 12). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
395 / 1278
5.2.188 (EN_POWER_SAVING) - (EN_POWER_SAVING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_POWER_SAVING EN_POWER_SAVING
Enables power saving on all TRXs in the cell. 0: the power saving is "disabled", 1: the power saving is "enabled". Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
If EN_POWER_SAVING is set to "enabled", the TRX dynamic power saving feature will be applied on all the TRXs in the cell belonging to G3, G4 or G5 TREs. The feature will however not be applied on the TRXs in the cell belonging to MC modules, due to the specific architecture of MC modules (unique power amplifier for all the TRXs). No No
396 / 1278
5.2.189 (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO) - (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of handover cause 21 (high level in neighbour cell in the preferred band). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
397 / 1278
5.2.190 (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING) - (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
This flag enables/disables the use of the parameter PRIORITY(0,n) in the candidate cell evaluation process. 0: Priority(0,n) not taken into account, 1: Priority(0,n) taken into account Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
No No
398 / 1278
5.2.191 (EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY) - (EN_RL_RECOV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY EN_RL_RECOV
This flag enables/disables the Radio Link Recovery procedure. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
399 / 1278
5.2.192 (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2) - (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2 EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2
Enables/disables the support of the "randomisation of fill bits in L2 message" feature on the DL Air interface of the cell. That feature brings more protection to voice calls using A5/1 encryption algorithm. 0: the DL randomisation is "disabled", 1: the DL randomisation is "enabled". Since a MS may move from one cell to another cell, the activation of the feature on few cells makes no sense. Alcatel-Lucent recommends on a large set of cells, like the BSS level. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted. Change applied only on new CS calls established after modification. No No
400 / 1278
5.2.193 (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) - (EN_REP_DL_FACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_REP_DL_FACCH EN_REP_DL_FACCH
Enables/Disables repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls. 0: disabled 1: enabled for LAPDm command frames 2: enabled for LAPDm command frames, and also for LAPDm response frames (valid only for the MS having indicated the support of the feature by Repeated ACCH Capability bit=1). Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
Function available on BSC Evolution only. Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
401 / 1278
5.2.194 (EN_REP_SACCH) - (EN_REP_SACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_REP_SACCH EN_REP_SACCH
Enables/Disables repeated SACCH for SAPI 0 frames in case of AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls (for mobile station having indicated the support of the feature). 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Function available on BSC Evolution only. Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
402 / 1278
5.2.195 (EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA) - (EN_RESCUE_UM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA EN_RESCUE_UM
This flag determines if emergency handovers are directed preferentially to umbrella cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled, 2: indefinite Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A enable (1) disable (0) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
403 / 1278
5.2.196 (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO) - (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Flag enabling the intracell handovers allowing to move TCH from the PS zone to the CS zone of PDCH/TCH allocation (intracell handover cause 30). Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
404 / 1278
5.2.197 (EN_RXLEV_DL) - (EN_RXLEV_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXLEV_DL EN_RXLEV_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink" handover cause (cause 5). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
405 / 1278
5.2.198 (EN_RXLEV_UL) - (EN_RXLEV_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXLEV_UL EN_RXLEV_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink" handover cause (cause 3). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
406 / 1278
5.2.199 (EN_RXQUAL_DL) - (EN_RXQUAL_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXQUAL_DL EN_RXQUAL_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality downlink" handover cause (cause 4). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
407 / 1278
5.2.200 (EN_RXQUAL_UL) - (EN_RXQUAL_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXQUAL_UL EN_RXQUAL_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality uplink" handover cause (cause 2). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
408 / 1278
5.2.201 (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE) - (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
This flag controls "Current channel" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
409 / 1278
5.2.202 (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER) - (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
This flag controls "Speech version (used)" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
410 / 1278
5.2.203 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SOLSA EN_SOLSA
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature. 0: disabled, 1: enabled May be set to Enabled only if BCCH_EXT=TRUE. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
411 / 1278
5.2.204 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SOLSA EN_SOLSA(n)
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an OMC internal cell. No No
412 / 1278
5.2.205 (EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION) - (EN_SPEED_DISC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION EN_SPEED_DISC
This flag enables/disables the speed discrimination process. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
413 / 1278
5.2.206 (EN_TCH_PREEMPT) - (EN_TCH_PREEMPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TCH_PREEMPT EN_TCH_PREEMPT
This flag enables/disables the TCH/VGCH pre-emption feature. If enabled, a point-to-point or voice group call with the pvi (pre-emption vulnerability indication) bit set might be pre-empted for a point-to-point or voice group call that has the pci (pre-emption capability indication) bit set if the concerned cell is in congestion state. 0:disabled, 1:enabled - EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is set to enable. - If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
In case one or more TCHs have been reserved for emergency handovers (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0) in the concerned cell, the BSC will first try to use one of these resources before actually releasing an ongoing call with lower priority and the pvi bit set. In case the cell is congested, if EN_TCH_PREEMPT is enabled and the MSC does not allow the queing, the BSC will queue an incoming point-to-point request with pre-emption capability indicator set during at most T11_forced seconds for a normal assignment or during at most T_qho seconds for an handover request. For the voice group call request, the BSC will follow the MSC indicator. No No
414 / 1278
5.2.207 (EN_TFO) - (EN_TFO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TFO EN_TFO
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function for FR, EFR and HR codec types. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
415 / 1278
5.2.208 (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_NB)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TFO_AMR_NB EN_TFO_AMR_NB
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of AMR-NB codec. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Function available on BSC Evolution only No No
416 / 1278
5.2.209 (EN_TFO_AMR_WB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_WB)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TFO_AMR_WB EN_TFO_AMR_WB
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of AMR-WB GMSK codec. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
417 / 1278
5.2.210 (EN_TFO_MATCH) - (EN_TFO_MATCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TFO_MATCH EN_TFO_MATCH
This flag enables/disables TFO codec mismatch resolution function (for FR, EFR, HR, AMR-NB and AMR-WB codecs). 0: disabled; 1: enabled - may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO=1 or if EN_TFO_AMR_WB=1 or if EN_TFO_AMR_NB=1 - May be set to 0 only if EN_TFO_OPT = 0 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
418 / 1278
5.2.211 (EN_TFO_OPT) - (EN_TFO_OPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_TFO_OPT EN_TFO_OPT
This flag enables/disables TFO codec optimisation function. 0: disabled; 1: enabled may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO_MATCH=1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
419 / 1278
5.2.212 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TRAFFIC_HO EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
This flag enables/disables the detection of "traffic" handover cause (cause 23). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
As the traffic load of cells external to the BSC is unknown, no HO cause 23 will be triggered towards these cells, even if EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1. No No
420 / 1278
5.2.213 (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT) - (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
This flag enables/disables the sending of UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT message. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
421 / 1278
5.2.214 (EXT_HO_FORCED) - (EXT_HO_FORCED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EXT_HO_FORCED EXT_HO_FORCED
This flag, when set, forces internal intercell handovers to be executed as external HO. 0: BSC performs internal HO, 1: MSC performs internal HO Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
422 / 1278
5.2.215 (Extended CBCH) - (Use_of_Extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Extended CBCH Use_of_Extended_CBCH
This flag indicates if the extended CBCH is used. 0: not used, 1: used shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Default value correspond to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1. If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, Use_of_Extended_CBCH should be set to "Yes". No No
423 / 1278
5.2.216 (FORBID_AMR_NS) - (FORBID_AMR_NS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FORBID_AMR_NS FORBID_AMR_NS
Flag to forbid / allow AMR-NB or AMR-WB noise suppressor in the MS. 0: the MS can use AMR NS, 1: the MS shall not use AMR NS. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Significant only if EN_AMR_FR, EN_AMR_HR or EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is set to TRUE. No No
424 / 1278
5.2.217 (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F) - (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Forbid use of downlink DTX on non hopping TCH of the BCCH TRX. 0 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is allowed; 1 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is forbidden If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which "dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs of the MC modules. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
425 / 1278
5.2.218 (Force TFO versus AMR) - (FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Force TFO versus AMR FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
Flag to enable/disable the basic functions of Tandem Free Operation (TFO) for GSM FR SV1, FR SV2 and HR SV1 codec types when the current codec is AMR-NB FR or AMR-NB HR and when TFO is not possible for the current call (TFO on AMR-NB not supported by the TC or not configured in the cell). 0: disabled, no TFO negotiation if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently used; 1: enabled, TFO negotiation will start even if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently used
Coding rules
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR = 1 only if EN_TFO=1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR relevant only if (EN_AMR_FR = 1 or EN_AMR_HR = 1) AND (EN_TFO = 1) AND (EN_TFO_AMR_NB = 0 or not supported by the BSS) No No
426 / 1278
5.2.219 (Forced_Queuing) - (QUEUE_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Forced_Queuing QUEUE_ANYWAY
This flag enables/disables forced queuing for Assignment requests when queuing is not allowed by the MSC. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
427 / 1278
5.2.220 (Forward_CM_3) - (EN_SEND_CM3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Forward_CM_3 EN_SEND_CM3
This flag enables/disables sending of "Classmark 3" IE to the MSC. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at the same time. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
The value of this parameter depends on whether the MSC supports the MS classmark 3 IE or not: if the MSC supports the MS classmark 3 IE then the parameter shall be set to "1", otherwise the parameter shall be set to "0". No No
428 / 1278
5.2.221 (Free_Factor_1) - (Freefactor_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Factor_1 Freefactor_1
Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
No No
429 / 1278

Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 <= Freefactor_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
No No
430 / 1278

No No
431 / 1278

No No
432 / 1278

Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_5 >= Freefactor_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
No No
433 / 1278
5.2.226 (Free_Level_1) - (Freelevel_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Level_1 Freelevel_1
Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_1 < Freelevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 1
No
434 / 1278

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 > Freelevel_1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
No
435 / 1278

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
No
436 / 1278

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
No
437 / 1278
5.2.230 (Free_Level_DR) - (Freelevel_DR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Level_DR Freelevel_DR(n)
Minimum number of free TCHs in neighbour cell n to allow forced directed retry to cell n. Freelevel_DR > N_TCH_HO Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 4
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb 255 * 255 *
438 / 1278
5.2.231 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the cell. 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" . - The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. - The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range. The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameters: - At cell creation - When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified. However, no check is performed when the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified. Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter are allowed depending on the value of the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter: - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem
Site (CAE) Number BSC
439 / 1278
Instance Value
cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0
External Comment
When the frequency range is changed from EGSM (resp. EGSM-DCS) to PGSM (resp. PGSM-DCS) or from PGSM (resp. PGSM-DCS) to EGSM (resp. EGSM-DCS), then all TRXs of the cell have the preserve call flag set to FALSE No No
440 / 1278
5.2.232 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS)
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell (GAN cell excluded). 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - If FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE(n) must be equal to "Concentric". - The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. - The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
Within the same PLMN, the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter of a given cell shall be selected among one of the following values: - PGSM (GSM900) or EGSM (GSM900) or DCS1800 or PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands", - GSM850 or DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands", - GSM850 or DCS1900 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands. No No
441 / 1278
5.2.233 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC)
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell (internal or external to the OMC). 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7: GAN, 8..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" . - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GAN" then CELL_RANGE must be equal to "GAN". - the value GAN is only allowed for the OMC external cells - The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. - The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range. The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameters: - At cell creation - When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified. However, no check is performed when the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified. Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter are allowed depending on the value of the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter: - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands", - FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category
Site (CAE)
442 / 1278
Type SubSystem Instance Value
Enumerated OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
443 / 1278
5.2.234 (GSM_PHASE) - (GSM_PHASE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GSM_PHASE GSM_PHASE
This flag indicates the GSM Phase used by the BSC to format messages towards the MSC. 0: GSM Phase 1, 1: GSM Phase 2 Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
444 / 1278
5.2.235 (H_LOAD_OBJ) - (H_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition H_LOAD_OBJ H_LOAD_OBJ
High threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to reduce MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. step size = 10% H_LOAD_OBJ >= L_LOAD_OBJ Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A See TRXnb N/A See TRXnb N/A N/A N/A N/A
445 / 1278
5.2.236 (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value H_MIN_DWELL_TIME H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Maximum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. H_MIN_DWELL_TIME >= L_MIN_DWELL_TIME Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 20
No No
446 / 1278
5.2.237 (High Priority Access Class Ordering P1) (AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules High Priority Access Class Ordering P1 AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1)
List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order. Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority, 10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14 (access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 15 Default 10
No No
447 / 1278

List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order. Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority 10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14 (access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
448 / 1278

No No
449 / 1278

No No
450 / 1278

No No
451 / 1278

No No
452 / 1278
5.2.243 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is high for circuit switched calls. HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD >= LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
External Comment
Default value depends on the number of TRX in the cell (see TRXnb default value). The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No
Cell Type Dependent
453 / 1278
5.2.244 (Highest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Highest BA range ARFCNs RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13)
Highest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information Element. RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 1023 Default -1
External Comment
RANGEi_HIGHER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA Range" IE. Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator of end of BA Range) No No
454 / 1278
5.2.245 (HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE) - (T_FILTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE T_FILTER
Maximum time a handover alarm is maintained while no more alarm condition is detected. step size = 2 x SACCH frames = 0.96s. Coded over 5 bits:0: 0s, 1: 0.96s, ..., 31: 29.76s Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
Coding rules
No No
455 / 1278
5.2.246 (HO_MARGIN) - (HOmargin (0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN HOmargin (0,n)
Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) which is required for a power budget HO. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 5
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 4 dB 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
456 / 1278
5.2.247 (HO_MARGIN_DIST) - (HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_DIST HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on distance handover causes. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 2
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB -29 dB 5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
457 / 1278
5.2.248 (HO_MARGIN_LEV) - (HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_LEV HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on level handover causes. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 2
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
458 / 1278
5.2.249 (HO_MARGIN_QUAL) - (HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_QUAL HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on quality handover causes Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
459 / 1278
5.2.250 (HR_ENABLED) - (HR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value HR_ENABLED HR_ENABLED
This flag controls if Half Rate TCH is enabled. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
460 / 1278
5.2.251 (IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE) - (IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL
This flag indicates whether or not a transmission alarm triggers the telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC). Note that the O&M activities are not dependent on this flag. 0: transmission alarms are not ignored and the telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are triggered; 1: transmission alarms are ignored and telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are not triggered; If BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE = IP, should be set to FALSE. Due to TDM switching on TC side, there is no more interaction between Atermux and ATR failures. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
461 / 1278
5.2.252 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IMSI Attach/Detach ATT (BSC)
This flag indicates to the MS if IMSI Attach/detach procedure is allowed in the cell. 0: not allowed, 1: allowed Equal to ATT (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
462 / 1278
5.2.253 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IMSI Attach/Detach ATT (MFS)
This flag indicates to the MS whether IMSI Attach/detach procedure is allowed in the cell. 0: not allowed, 1: allowed Equal to ATT (BSC) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
463 / 1278
5.2.254 (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is indefinite for circuit switched calls. IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 OR LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
No
464 / 1278
5.2.255 (INTAVE) - (INTAVE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INTAVE INTAVE
Averaging period for interference measurements on idle TCH timeslots. step size=1 Samfr INTAVE < T_INTRF_L3 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 10
No No
465 / 1278
5.2.256 (INTERCELL_HO) - (HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INTERCELL_HO HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED
This flag enables/disables the execution of all outgoing intercell handovers. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry No No
466 / 1278
5.2.257 (Interference bands 1-2 limit) - (INTFBD1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Interference bands 1-2 limit INTFBD1
Limit between interference band 1 and interference band 2. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm INTFBD1 < INTFBD2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
467 / 1278

Limit between interference band 2 and interference band 3. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm INTFBD3 > INTFBD2 > INTFBD1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -95
No No
468 / 1278

No No
469 / 1278

No No
470 / 1278
5.2.261 (INTRACELL_HO) - (HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value INTRACELL_HO HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED
This flag enables/disables the execution of intracell handovers. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. The flags specific to the TFO feature, I.e. EN_TFO, EN_TFO_MATCH, EN_TFO_OPT, EN_IPE_PREF_CODEC_TYPE, are set independently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED. Additionally, the flag related to handover cause 30, EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO is set independently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED. The handovers for TFO reasons (cause 29) and RAE4 reasons (cause 30) can therefore be performed even if HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = disabled. No No
471 / 1278
5.2.262 (Keep codec on handover) - (KEEP_CODEC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Keep codec on handover KEEP_CODEC_HO
Indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec for internal incoming handovers. 0:free choice of the codec ; 1:try to maintain codec for TFO calls only; 2: try to maintain codec for all calls Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
472 / 1278
5.2.263 (L_LOAD_OBJ) - (L_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_LOAD_OBJ L_LOAD_OBJ
Low threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to increase MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. step size = 10% L_LOAD_OBJ <= H_LOAD_OBJ Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A See TRXnb N/A See TRXnb N/A N/A N/A N/A
473 / 1278
5.2.264 (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_MIN_DWELL_TIME L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Minimum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. L_MIN_DWELL_TIME <= H_MIN_DWELL_TIME Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 8
No No
474 / 1278
5.2.265 (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO) - (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXLEV_CPT_HO L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n)
Minimum received downlink level from cell n for umbrella to neighbour lower layer cell n handover or from classical band to preferred band cell n handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -85
No No
475 / 1278
5.2.266 (L_RXLEV_DL_H) - (L_RXLEV_DL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_H L_RXLEV_DL_H
Downlink level threshold for handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_DL_H < U_RXLEV_DL_P. L_RXLEV_DL_H < RXLEV_DL_IH L_RXLEV_D_H < L_RXLEV_DL_P If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900": RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
Recommended rules
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -96 dBm (14) -91 dBm (19) -96 dBm (14) -98 dBm (12)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
476 / 1278
5.2.267 (L_RXLEV_DL_P) - (L_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXLEV_DL_P L_RXLEV_DL_P
Lower downlink level threshold for power control. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_DL_P < U_RXLEV_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -85
No No
477 / 1278
5.2.268 (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR) - (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
Minimum level received from neighbour cell n to allow forced directed retry to cell n. Coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -110
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -70 dBm (40) -85 dBm (25) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
478 / 1278
5.2.269 (L_RXLEV_UL_H) - (L_RXLEV_UL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_H L_RXLEV_UL_H
Uplink level threshold for handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_UL_H < U_RXLEV_UL_P L_RXLEV_UL_H < RXLEV_UL_IH L_RXLEV_UL_H < L_RXLEV_UL_P If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900": RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
Recommended rules
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
479 / 1278
5.2.270 (L_RXLEV_UL_P) - (L_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXLEV_UL_P L_RXLEV_UL_P
Lower uplink level threshold for power control. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_UL_P < U_RXLEV_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -90
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
480 / 1278
5.2.271 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_H L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB). step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_DL_H >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Higher value is the worst quality No No
481 / 1278
5.2.272 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-NB calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
482 / 1278
5.2.273 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-WB GMSK calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
483 / 1278
5.2.274 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_P L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of any calls, except the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL FACCH and Repeated SACCH are activated. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_DL_P > U_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality. There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH, for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH and SACCH. No No
484 / 1278
5.2.275 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH) (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are activated. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_DL_P To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends : L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
Coding rules
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - Highest value is the worst quality. - If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_DL_P in the previous release, then the new parameter L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the CDE table with THAT customized value. -Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
485 / 1278
5.2.276 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_UL_H L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Uplink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (nether AMR-NB nor AMR-WB). step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_UL_H >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Higher value is the worst quality No No
486 / 1278
5.2.277 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-NB calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
487 / 1278
5.2.278 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-WB GMSK calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
488 / 1278
5.2.279 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_UL_P L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of any calls, except the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL FACCH and Repeated SACCH are activated. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_UL_P > U_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality. There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH, for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH and SACCH. No No
489 / 1278
5.2.280 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH) (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are activated. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_UL_P To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends : L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
Coding rules
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - Highest value is the worst quality. - If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_P in the previous release, then the new parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the CDE table with THAT customized value. - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
490 / 1278
5.2.281 (LAC) - (LAC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC (BSC)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Equal to LAC (MFS) A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
491 / 1278
5.2.282 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC(n) (BSC)
Location Area Code of adjacent cell. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time. Equal to LAC(n)(MFS). A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
492 / 1278
5.2.283 (Link_factor) - (Linkfactor (0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Link_factor Linkfactor (0,n)
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to handicap or favour cell n. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -24 Maximum 24 Default 0
No No
493 / 1278
5.2.284 (Load computation in outer zone) - (EN_LOAD_OUTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Load computation in outer zone EN_LOAD_OUTER
Flag to enable/disable the load computation on the outer zone of a Concentric/multiband cell instead of the load computation on the whole cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled When enabled, the values of the parameters FREElevel_1 to FREElevel_4 need to be updated to number of TRX considered in the load computation. EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both "Enabled". Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
significant only for concentric and multiband cells. No No
494 / 1278
5.2.285 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOAD_EV_PERIOD LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Number of load samples (received every TCH_INFO_PERIOD) for load averaging. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 12
No No
495 / 1278
5.2.286 (Load_Factor_1) - (Loadfactor_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Load_Factor_1 Loadfactor_1
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
No No
496 / 1278

Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 >= Loadfactor_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 0 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
497 / 1278

Nb of TRX Dependent
No
498 / 1278

Nb of TRX Dependent
No
499 / 1278

Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_5 <= Loadfactor_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
500 / 1278
5.2.291 (Load_Level_1) - (Loadlevel_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Load_Level_1 Loadlevel_1
Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 50
No No
501 / 1278

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
No No
502 / 1278

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 < Loadlevel_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
No No
503 / 1278

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_4 > Loadlevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 90
No No
504 / 1278
5.2.295 (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is low for circuit switched calls. LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
External Comment
If LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD is set to 0 in a given cell n, then no Handover Cause 23 (i.e. Traffic Handovers) can be triggered towards that cell n. No
Cell Type Dependent
505 / 1278
5.2.296 (LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (L_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE L_TIME_ADVANCE
Low threshold to trigger handover cause "too short distance" in outer cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 0
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
506 / 1278
5.2.297 (Lowest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Lowest BA range ARFCNs RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13)
Lowest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information Element. Coded on 16 bits. RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 1023 Default -1
External Comment
RANGEi_LOWER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA Range" IE Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator of end of BA Range) No No
507 / 1278
5.2.298 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules LSA_ID_I LSA_ID_array (BSC)
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Equal to LSA_ID_array (MFS) The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number), as defined in GSM 03.03. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
External Comment
The default value depends on the configuration. The value given here is for implementation purposes only. No No
508 / 1278
5.2.299 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules LSA_ID_I LSA_ID_array (MFS)
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Equal to LSA_ID_array (BSC) The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number), as defined in GSM 03.03. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
External Comment
The default value depends on the configuration. The value given here is for implementation purposes only. No No
509 / 1278
5.2.300 (LSA_ID_I(n)) - (LSA_ID_array (n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value LSA_ID_I(n) LSA_ID_array (n)
List of authorised LSAs on a neighbour cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
External Comment
This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an OMC internal cell. No No
510 / 1278
5.2.301 (LSA_OFFSET) - (LSA_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LSA_OFFSET LSA_OFFSET
Offset to be used for LSA cell reselection between cells with the same LSA priorities. coded from 0 to 7, where 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 4 dB, 2 = 8 dB, 3 = 16 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 32 dB, 6 = 48 dB, 7 = 64 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 0
Coding rules
The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS. No No
511 / 1278
5.2.302 (LSA_PRIO_THR) - (PRIO_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules LSA_PRIO_THR PRIO_THR
Signal threshold for applying LSA cell reselection. coded from 0 to 7; step size = 6 dB (i.e. 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 6 dB, 2 = 12 dB, 3 = 18 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 30 dB, 6 = 36 dB, 7 = infinite = 42 dB). Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 42 Default 42
External Comment
The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS. The maximum and default values correspond to an infinite threshold. No No
512 / 1278
5.2.303 (MATE_CI) - (MATE_CI (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules MATE_CI MATE_CI (BSC)
Cell Identity of the Mate cell MATE_CI (BSC) = MATE_CI (MFS) If one mate cell is configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) then the other mate cell shall also be configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. (MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only No No
513 / 1278
5.2.304 (MATE_LAC) - (MATE_LAC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules MATE_LAC MATE_LAC
Location Area Code of the Mate cell. Step size = 1 For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. (MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only No No
514 / 1278
5.2.305 (MAX_POW_INC) - (MAX_POW_INC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_POW_INC MAX_POW_INC
Maximum Power increase in one power command. step size = 2dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Default 8
No No
515 / 1278
5.2.306 (MAX_POW_RED) - (MAX_POW_RED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_POW_RED MAX_POW_RED
Maximum Power reduction in one power command. step size = 2dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Default 8
No No
516 / 1278
5.2.307 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS Max_retrans (BSC)
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the RACH. Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01, 10 and 11 Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
No No
517 / 1278
5.2.308 (MEAS_STAT_BFI_1) - (MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_BFI_1 MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1]
Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 1
External Comment
518 / 1278

Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI3 > MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 2
External Comment
519 / 1278

External Comment
520 / 1278

External Comment
521 / 1278

External Comment
522 / 1278

External Comment
523 / 1278

External Comment
524 / 1278

External Comment
525 / 1278

Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI9 > MEAS_STAT_BFI8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 22
External Comment
526 / 1278
5.2.317 (MEAS_STAT_C_I_1) - (MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_C_I_1 MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1]
Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default -12
External Comment
527 / 1278

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 < MEAS_STAT_CI3 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default -9
External Comment
528 / 1278

External Comment
529 / 1278

External Comment
530 / 1278

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI4 < MEAS_STAT_CI5 < MEAS_STAT_CI6 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default 0
External Comment
531 / 1278

External Comment
532 / 1278

External Comment
533 / 1278

External Comment
534 / 1278

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI8 < MEAS_STAT_CI9 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default 12
External Comment
535 / 1278
5.2.326 (MEAS_STAT_LEV_1) - (MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1]
Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -53
External Comment
536 / 1278

Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_3 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -60
External Comment
537 / 1278

External Comment
538 / 1278

External Comment
539 / 1278

External Comment
540 / 1278

External Comment
541 / 1278

External Comment
542 / 1278

External Comment
543 / 1278

Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_8 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_9 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -104
External Comment
544 / 1278
5.2.335 (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1) - (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1 MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1]
Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 < MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default -50
Coding rules
External Comment
545 / 1278

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default -30
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
546 / 1278

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
547 / 1278

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
548 / 1278

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL6 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL5 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL4 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
549 / 1278

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
550 / 1278

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
551 / 1278

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
552 / 1278

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL9 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default 50
Coding rules
External Comment
553 / 1278
5.2.344 (MEAS_STAT_S_1) - (MEAS_STAT_S_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_S_1 MEAS_STAT_S_i [1]
Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S1 < MEAS_STAT_S2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 1
External Comment
554 / 1278

Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S3 > MEAS_STAT_S2 > MEAS_STAT_S1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 4
External Comment
555 / 1278

External Comment
556 / 1278

External Comment
557 / 1278

External Comment
558 / 1278

External Comment
559 / 1278

External Comment
560 / 1278

External Comment
561 / 1278

Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S9 > MEAS_STAT_S8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 22
External Comment
562 / 1278
5.2.353 (MEAS_STAT_TA_1) - (MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_TA_1 MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1]
Upper limit of the first TA band, lower limit of the second TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) 0 < MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 7
External Comment
563 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd TA band, lower limit of the 3rd TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 13
External Comment
564 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd TA band, lower limit of the 4th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3 < MEAS_STAT_TA_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 19
External Comment
565 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th TA band, lower limit of the 5th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_3 < MEAS_STAT_TA_4 < MEAS_STAT_TA_5 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 25
External Comment
566 / 1278

External Comment
567 / 1278

External Comment
568 / 1278

External Comment
569 / 1278

External Comment
570 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th TA band, lower limit of the 10th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_8 < MEAS_STAT_TA_9 < 63 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 55
External Comment
571 / 1278
5.2.362 (MIN_CONNECT_TIME) - (MIN_CONNECT_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_CONNECT_TIME MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Maximum connection time after a handover in an overlaid cell to declare the MS "fast" when leaving the cell with a handover. step size=1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 40
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 20 s 40 s N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
572 / 1278
5.2.363 (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL) - (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_RLF_TIME_DL MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Minimum time before detecting a radio link failure of a DL TBF, triggered by N3105 or NstagnatingWindowDL. step size = 100 ms It is recommended to set a value close to the time of temporary very bad radio conditions that the operator would like to support during a DL TBF. Typically, a few seconds. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 25000 Default 4000
No No
573 / 1278
5.2.364 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Country Code (MCC) MCC (BSC)
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled: - MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS). - The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
External Comment
The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
574 / 1278
5.2.365 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Network Code (MNC) MNC (BSC)
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled: - MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS). - The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
External Comment
The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table. MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111) MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
575 / 1278
5.2.366 (MS_P_CON_ACK) - (MS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MS_P_CON_ACK MS_P_CON_ACK
Supervision of the MS Power Control procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 3s 3s 3s 3s 2s 3s 3s 3s
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
576 / 1278
5.2.367 (MS_P_CON_INT) - (MS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MS_P_CON_INT MS_P_CON_INT
Minimum delay between two consecutive MS power commands. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 1
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 1s 1s 1s 1s 0s 1s 1s 1s
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
577 / 1278
5.2.368 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MAX MS_TXPWR_MAX
MS maximum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm,...., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
External Comment
578 / 1278
5.2.369 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MAX MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
MS maximum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
External Comment
According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently: - Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); - Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); -Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
579 / 1278
5.2.370 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
580 / 1278
5.2.371 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
MS maximum allowed transmission power in the inner zone of a concentric or multiband cell. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently: - Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); - Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS); - Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). Meaninful only in cells where: CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = concentric.
581 / 1278
Cell Type Dependent
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell
N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
582 / 1278
5.2.372 (MS_TXPWR_MIN) - (MS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MIN MS_TXPWR_MIN
MS minimum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ...,13: 17 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 13: 17 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MIN <= MS_TXPWR_MAX and MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 17
Mandatory rules
External Comment
The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band: Default value for P-GSM/G1: 17 dBm Default value for GSM850: 17 dBm Default value for DCS1800: 4 dBm Default value for DCS1900: 4 dBm No No
583 / 1278
5.2.373 (MSC Signalling Point Code) - (DPC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MSC Signalling Point Code DPC
Signalling Point Code of the MSC. coded over 14 bits Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default 12
External Comment
- Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. - Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to FALSE. No No
584 / 1278
5.2.374 (MSCR) - (MSCR (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSCR MSCR (BSC)
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement MSC software. 0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
585 / 1278
5.2.375 (MSCR) - (MSCR (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSCR MSCR (MFS)
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement MSC software. 0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
586 / 1278
5.2.376 (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format) (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MTP_Sequence_Number_Format MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Defines the format to be used for the sequence number of MTP2. 0: Normal 1: Extended Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Value "Extended" is refused by the BSC if EN_HSL=0 No No
587 / 1278
5.2.377 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_REPORTING MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS. Coded over 2 bits: 00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used; 01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
588 / 1278
5.2.378 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_REPORTING MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS. Coded over 2 bits: 00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used; 01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
589 / 1278
5.2.379 (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving cell to trigger a multiband handover. 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
No No
590 / 1278
5.2.380 (N_BAD_SACCH) - (N_BAD_SACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_BAD_SACCH N_BAD_SACCH
Number of consecutive bad SACCH frames to trigger a rescue handover. 1) N_BAD_SACCH = RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M +1 2) In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30 seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.
Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 128 Default 4
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
591 / 1278
5.2.381 (N_TCH_HO) - (N_TCH_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N_TCH_HO N_TCH_HO
Number of less interfered Full Rate TCH reserved for handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
No No
592 / 1278
5.2.382 (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_TRAFFIC_LOAD N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Number of consecutive load averages used in traffic load evaluation process. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 1
No
593 / 1278
5.2.383 (NB_CLR_REQ) - (N_CLR_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NB_CLR_REQ N_CLR_REQ
Maximum number of CLEAR REQUEST message transmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 8 Default 4
No No
594 / 1278
5.2.384 (NB_PREF_CELLS) - (N_PREF_CELLS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_PREF_CELLS N_PREF_CELLS
Maximum number of candidate cells sent in one HANDOVER REQUIRED. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 3
No No
595 / 1278
5.2.385 (Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step) - (M2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step M2
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are unbarred in one step. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 2
No No
596 / 1278
5.2.386 (Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step) - (N1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step N1
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are barred in one step. Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of low priority access classes. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
597 / 1278
5.2.387 (Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step) - (N2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step N2
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are unbarred in one step. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
No No
598 / 1278
5.2.388 (Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step) - (M1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step M1
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are barred in one step. Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of high priority access classes Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 2
No No
599 / 1278
5.2.389 (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP) - (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_RESET_CIC_REP NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Maximum number of RESET CIRCUIT message repetitions when not acknowledged by the MSC. 255: RESET CIRCUIT message is indefinitely repeated Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 6
No No
600 / 1278
5.2.390 (NBR_RESET_REP) - (NBR_RESET_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_RESET_REP NBR_RESET_REP
Number of times the RESET message is sent without being acknowledged by the MSC before an alarm is reported. If NBR_RESET_REP = 0, RESET message is not sent Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 6
No No
601 / 1278
5.2.391 (NCC) - (NCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules NCC NCC (BSC)
Network Colour code of the cell. Coded over 3 bits. - Equal to NCC (MFS) - NCC (BSC) shall be included in NCC_permited Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
602 / 1278
5.2.392 (NCC) - (NCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules NCC NCC (MFS)
Network Colour code of the cell. Coded over 3 bits. - Equal to NCC (BSC) - NCC (MFS) shall be included in NCC_permited Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
603 / 1278
5.2.393 (NCC) - (NCC(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NCC NCC(n)
Network Colour code of the neighbour cell. Coded over 3 bits. NCC(n) shall be included in NCC_permited of the serving cell Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. This parameter is for every cell (OMC external cells and OMC internal cells). The operator needs to configure the value of that parameter for every cell. No No
604 / 1278
5.2.394 (NCC permitted) - (NCC_permitted)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NCC permitted NCC_permitted
Indicates which NCC values the MS considers as belonging to the network. Coded over 8 bits. each bit corresponds to a NCC value: MSB corresponds to NCC = 7, LSB corresponds to NCC = 0. For each bit:0= NCC not permitted, 1= NCC permitted NCC of the serving cell and of its neighbor cells shall be included in NCC_permited Site (CAE) Bitmap BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
605 / 1278
5.2.395 (NCI) - (NCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NCI NCI
This flag indicates to the MS if it reports a HANDOVER FAILURE in case of out of range timing advance. 0: Out of range timing advance is ignored, 1: Out of range timing advance triggers a Handover Failure procedure Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
606 / 1278
5.2.396 (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV) - (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n)
Threshold of maximum received level from the neighbour cells for cause 13. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A -47 dBm (63) -47 dBm (63) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
607 / 1278
5.2.397 (NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO) - (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO
Number of full rate TCH reserved for incoming emergency handovers (plus Cause 12 and Cause 27 handovers). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
External Comment
The Pre-emption procedure (in case EN_TCH_PREEMPT = enabled) might use these reserved TCHs in order to avoid releasing an on-going call unnecessarily. No No
608 / 1278
5.2.398 (NY_1) - (NY1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NY_1 NY1
Maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION. For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR. For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 35 Default 20
No No
609 / 1278
5.2.399 (OFFSET_CA_HIGH) - (OFFSET_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_CA_HIGH OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under high load (Handover Cause 26). step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70) OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
610 / 1278
5.2.400 (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL) - (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_CA_NORMAL OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under normal load (Handover Cause 26). step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70) OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
No No
611 / 1278
5.2.401 (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER) - (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Offset which allows to take into account the radio differences between the inner and the outer zone (especially in multiband cells). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 0
No No
612 / 1278
5.2.402 (OFFSET_HOPPING_HO) - (Offset_Hopping_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HOPPING_HO Offset_Hopping_HO
Offset applied in the handover quality causes for radio hopping channels. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
No No
613 / 1278
5.2.403 (OFFSET_HOPPING_PC) - (Offset_Hopping_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HOPPING_PC Offset_Hopping_PC
Offset applied in the power control quality causes for hopping radio channels. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
614 / 1278
5.2.404 (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV) - (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n)
Minimum received level from umbrella cell n to allow handover cause "level uplink micro-cell" or "level downlink micro-cell". coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -80
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -88 dBm (22) -88 dBm (22) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
615 / 1278
5.2.405 (Own SPC) - (OPC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Own SPC OPC
Signalling Point Code of the BSC. coded over 14 bits Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default 12
External Comment
- Must be equal to DPC and SSF used by the MSC and RNC and SMLC for adressing the BSC. - Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. - Parameter change: Before any modification of the OPC, the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of the OPC, the operator shall trigger a BSC restart. The locked objects must be unlocked again to reopen the telecom service. No No
616 / 1278
5.2.406 (PAGING) - (PAG_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PAGING PAG_BAR
This flag indicates if transmission of Pagings is allowed in the cell. 0: Pagings are not barred, 1: Pagings are barred Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
this flag can be used by an operator to temporarily prevent phones from ringing in specific cells No No
617 / 1278
5.2.407 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(BSC)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) 20 s (0) 20 s (0) inhibited (31) inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
618 / 1278
5.2.408 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(MFS)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value. PENALTY_TIME(MFS) = PENALTY_TIME(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
No No
619 / 1278
5.2.409 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
No No
620 / 1278
5.2.410 (PING_PONG_HANDICAP) - (PING_PONG_HCP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PING_PONG_HANDICAP PING_PONG_HCP
A transient handicap is applied to power budget of previous cell to avoid a "ping-pong" effect. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 15
No No
621 / 1278
5.2.411 (POW_INC_FACTOR) - (POW_INC_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value POW_INC_FACTOR POW_INC_FACTOR
Weighting factor for power increase. step size = 0.1 POW_INC_FACTOR >= POW_RED_FACTOR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.8
No No
622 / 1278
5.2.412 (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition POW_INC_STEP_SIZE POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Power increase step size in case of power command triggered on quality criterion. step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB, ..., 7: 14 dB POW_INC_STEP_SIZE > POW_RED_STEP_SIZE Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 14 Default 6
No No
623 / 1278
5.2.413 (POW_RED_FACTOR) - (POW_RED_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value POW_RED_FACTOR POW_RED_FACTOR
Weighting factor for power reduction. step size = 0.1 POW_RED_FACTOR <= POW_INC_FACTOR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.5
No No
624 / 1278
5.2.414 (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition POW_RED_STEP_SIZE POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Power reduction step size in case of power command triggered on quality criterion. step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < POW_INC_STEP_SIZE Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 4 Default 2
No No
625 / 1278
5.2.415 (Preference Mark) - (TRX_PREF_MARK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Preference Mark TRX_PREF_MARK
Preference mark assigned to a given TRX. 0: PS/CS TRX: This TRX can carry PS and CS traffic and has the lowest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to serve a CS call. 1: CS TRX with preference mark 1: This TRX can carry only CS traffic and has the preference mark 1 in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to serve a CS call. ... 7: CS TRX with preference mark 7: This TRX can carry only CS traffic and has the highest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to served a CS call. It means that this TRX has the highest priority for CS traffic. 1) For a TRX in the inner zone of a monoband or multiband concentric cell, the parameter TRX_PREF_MARK shall be set to a non-null value. 2) For a hopping G1 TRX, if EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY = 0 and BCCH/CCCH are configured on PGSM TRX, then TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH: i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined" ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined" iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX. 4) In case of cell shared over 2 BTSs, the GPRS TRXs of the cell (ie TRX_PREF_MARK=0) can be either on the main sector or on the secondary, but not on both. 5) the maximum number of PS capable TRX (ie TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) defined in one cell is 16.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance
Site (CAE) Number BSC TRX
626 / 1278
Value
Unit None
Minimum 0
Maximum 7
Default 1
External Comment
If EGPRS is activated in the cell, TRX_PREF_MARK (BCCH TRX) = 0 and the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware and a transmission pool allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 05.05 and 3GPP TS 05.08 requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined in timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX). No No
627 / 1278
5.2.416 (PREFERRED_BAND) - (PREFERRED_BAND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PREFERRED_BAND PREFERRED_BAND
Frequency band to which the multiband MS are preferentially directed. 0: none, 1: GSM, 2: DCS Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
External Comment
628 / 1278
5.2.417 (Preventive cyclic retransmission flag) - (EN_PCR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Preventive cyclic retransmission flag EN_PCR
This flag enables preventive cyclic retransmission. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
This parameter is set to 1 by the BSC in case the Ater links of a BSS are configured as satellite links. No No
629 / 1278
5.2.418 (PWRC) - (PWRC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PWRC PWRC (BSC)
This flag indicates to the MS if it includes measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel. 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency are included, 1: measurements made on BCCH frequency are not included. Equal to PWRC (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
No No
630 / 1278
5.2.419 (PWRC) - (PWRC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PWRC PWRC (MFS)
This flag indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel. 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall be included, 1: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall not be included Equal to PWRC (BSC) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
No No
631 / 1278
5.2.420 (Q703_N1) - (Q703_N1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_N1 Q703_N1
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 127
not used if EN_HSL = 1 No No
632 / 1278
5.2.421 (Q703_N1_HSL) - (Q703_N1_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N1_HSL Q703_N1_HSL
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission (if HSL is used). step size 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4095 Default 4095
used if EN_HSL = 1 No No
633 / 1278
5.2.422 (Q703_N2) - (Q703_N2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N2 Q703_N2
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for retransmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit bytes Minimum 1 Maximum 8192 Default 4096
634 / 1278
5.2.423 (Q703_N2_HSL) - (Q703_N2_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N2_HSL Q703_N2_HSL
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for retransmission (if HSL is used). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit bytes Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 32767
635 / 1278
5.2.424 (Q703_T1) - (Q703_T1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T1 Q703_T1
MTP2 timer "alignment ready". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit 1/10 sec Minimum 40 Maximum 50 Default 50
636 / 1278
5.2.425 (Q703_T1_HSL) - (Q703_T1_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T1_HSL Q703_T1_HSL
MTP2 timer "alignment ready" for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 25 Maximum 350 Default 300
637 / 1278
5.2.426 (Q703_T2) - (Q703_T2)

MTP2 timer "not aligned". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit 1/10 sec Minimum 5 Maximum 150 Default 30
No No
638 / 1278
5.2.427 (Q703_T3) - (Q703_T3)

MTP2 timer "aligned". step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
No No
639 / 1278
5.2.428 (Q703_T4E) - (Q703_T4E)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4E Q703_T4E
MTP2 Emergency proving period. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.4 Maximum 0.6 Default 0.5
Applicable to LSL and HSL. No No
640 / 1278
5.2.429 (Q703_T4N) - (Q703_T4N)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4N Q703_T4N
MTP2 Normal proving period. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 7.5 Maximum 9.5 Default 8.2
641 / 1278
5.2.430 (Q703_T4N_HSL) - (Q703_T4N_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4N_HSL Q703_T4N_HSL
MTP2 Normal proving period for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used). step size = 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 70 Default 30
642 / 1278
5.2.431 (Q703_T5) - (Q703_T5)

MTP2 timer "sending SIB". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 80 Maximum 120 Default 100
No No
643 / 1278
5.2.432 (Q703_T6) - (Q703_T6)

MTP2 timer "remote congestion". step size = 0.1sec Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6 Default 5.4
No No
644 / 1278
5.2.433 (Q703_T7) - (Q703_T7)

MTP2 timer "excessive delay of acknowledgement". step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 2 Default 1
External Comment
In case of a Ater satellite connection, this parameter is set to 2 seconds by the BSC. No No
645 / 1278
5.2.434 (Q704_T2) - (Q704_T2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q704_T2 Q704_T2
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeover acknowledgement. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.7 Maximum 2 Default 2
No No
646 / 1278
5.2.435 (Q704_T4) - (Q704_T4)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback acknowledgement (first attempt). step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1.2 Default 1
No No
647 / 1278
5.2.436 (Q704_T5) - (Q704_T5)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback acknowledgement (second attempt). step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1.2 Default 1
No No
648 / 1278
5.2.437 (Q707_T1) - (Q707_T1)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of signalling link test acknowledgement. step size = 0.1sec Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 12 Default 6.4
No No
649 / 1278
5.2.438 (Q707_T2) - (Q707_T2)

MTP3 delay between transmission of consecutive signalling link test message. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 30 Maximum 90 Default 60
No No
650 / 1278
5.2.439 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST filtering. 64: no filtering Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS). Disable the filtering for extended cells. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 64
External Comment
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are discarded. No No
651 / 1278
5.2.440 (RACH_BUSY_THRES) - (RACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules RACH_BUSY_THRES RACH_BUSY_THRES
Received level above which a RACH TS is deemed busy. This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows: 1: -110 dBm 5: -106 dBm 9: -102 dBm 13: -98 dBm 17: -94 dBm 21: -90 dBm 25: -86 dBm 29: -82 dBm 33: -78 dBm 37: -74 dBm 41: -70 dBm 45: -66 dBm 49: -62 dBm 53: -58 dBm 57: -54 dBm 61: -50 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -50 Default -106
No No
652 / 1278
5.2.441 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path, for non AMR calls, or for AMR calls (NB or WB) for which Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS > N_BSTXPWR_M Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values): It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime. Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 18
No No
653 / 1278
5.2.442 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR) (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path for calls using an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated SACCH and/or Repeated DL FACCH are not activated. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR > N_BSTXPWR_M Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values): It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime. Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 18
No No
654 / 1278
5.2.443 (RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES) - (N_BSTXPWR_M)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES N_BSTXPWR_M
Counter threshold to trigger a radio link recovery. N_BSTXPWR_M < RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 13
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
655 / 1278
5.2.444 (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH) - (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH
Repeated DL SACCH activation threshold for UL RLT (Radio Link Timer) counter. Dynamic activation is triggered in the BTS when the UL RLT counter is inferior or equal to that threshold. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 10
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only - The setting of this value is a trade-off between "triggering REP_DL_SACCH soon enough to take benefit from it before drop" and "triggering REP_DL_SACCH not too soon to let time to the recovery mechanism to increase the output power of the BTS to its max level before". - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
656 / 1278
5.2.445 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision. This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
Coding rules
No No
657 / 1278
5.2.446 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision. This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
Coding rules
No No
658 / 1278
5.2.447 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision, for a call using an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated SACCH and/or Repeated DL FACCH are not activated. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
Coding rules
No No
659 / 1278
5.2.448 (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT) (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT
Legacy support for repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls. This parameter concerns only the LAPDm command frames. 0: repeated DL FACCH enabled only for the AMR mobile stations having indicated the support of the feature by repeated ACCH Capability bit = 1 1: repeated DL FACCH enabled for all AMR mobile stations Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- This parameter is relevant only if repeated downlink FACCH (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) is enabled. - Function available on BSC Evolution only. - The value 1 is used to tackle early implementations, ie for MS with repeated ACCH Capability bit=0 or MS without Repeated ACCH Capability bit (legacy MS). - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
660 / 1278
5.2.449 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB FR calls. Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMR value) is inferior or equal to that threshold. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 8 Default 3 off 4,75 kbit/s 5,15 kbit/s 5,90 kbit/s 6,70 kbit/s 7,40 kbit/s 7,95 kbit/s 10,2 kbit/s 12,2 kbit/s
Coding rules
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DL FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB FR codec (if allowed for the call). -Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
661 / 1278
5.2.450 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB HR calls. Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMR value) is inferior or equal to that threshold. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 3 off 4,75 kbit/s 5,15 kbit/s 5,90 kbit/s 6,70 kbit/s 7,40 kbit/s
Coding rules
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DL FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB HR codec (if allowed for the call). - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
662 / 1278
5.2.451 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-WB GMSK calls. Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMR value) is inferior or equal to that threshold. 0: 1: 2: 3: Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 1 off 6,60 kbit/s 8,85 kbit/s 12,65 kbit/s
Coding rules
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only. - When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DL FACCH is always activated for AMR-WB GMSK codec (if allowed for the call). - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on new calls (after modification). No No
663 / 1278
5.2.452 (Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high priority messages within the schedule period for basic CBCH. shall be set to "0" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 0
No No
664 / 1278
5.2.453 (Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high priority messages within the schedule period for extended CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 0
No No
665 / 1278
5.2.454 (RESET_INDEFINITE) - (RESET_INDEFINITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RESET_INDEFINITE RESET_INDEFINITE
This flag determines whether or not the RESET message shall be sent indefinitely (as long as it is not acknowledged). 0: RESET message is sent a maximum of NBR_RESET_REP times, 1: The Reset procedure is repeated until a RESET or RESET ACK message is received. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
666 / 1278
5.2.455 (RESP_REQ) - (RESP_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RESP_REQ RESP_REQ
This flag controls "Response request" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE not included, 1: IE included When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended to include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED message (RESP_REQ). Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EXT_DR is set to enabled in order to get a Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested and thus to attempt other procedures. No No
667 / 1278
5.2.456 (RF_RES_IND_PERIOD) - (T_INTRF_L3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules RF_RES_IND_PERIOD T_INTRF_L3
Delay between two consecutive RF RESOURCE INDICATION. step size = 1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) & T_INTRF_L3 > INTAVE Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 180 Default 60
No No
668 / 1278
5.2.457 (RMS_TEMPLATE) - (RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMS_TEMPLATE RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX
Template of values of RMS parameters to be applied to the concerned cell (concerns the parameters MEAS_STAT_C_Ix, MEAS_STAT_BFIx, MEAS_STAT_LEVx, MEAS_STAT_PATH_BALx, MEAS_STAT_Sx, EN_BALANCED_CI, VQ_AVERAGE, VQ_BAD_RXFER, VQ_FER_THRESHOLD, VQ_GOOD_RXFER, VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD, VQ_RXLEV, VQ_RXQUAL, VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER). coded from 1 to 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 1
No No
669 / 1278
5.2.458 (ROT) - (ROT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ROT ROT
Indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include "Time Difference" IE in HANDOVER COMPLETE. 0: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is NOT included in HANDOVER COMPLETE, 1: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is included in HANDOVER COMPLETE Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
670 / 1278
5.2.459 (RSL_RATE (BSC)) - (RSL_RATE (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RSL_RATE (BSC) RSL_RATE (BSC)
Rate used on all RSL links towards a BTS. 0: 16 kbit/s, 1: 64 kbit/s Site (CAE) Flag BSC BTS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
671 / 1278
5.2.460 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
672 / 1278
5.2.461 (RXLEV_DL_IH) - (RXLEV_DL_IH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_DL_IH RXLEV_DL_IH
Downlink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell handover in case of bad downlink quality. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. RXLEV_DL_IH > L_RXLEV_DL_H Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -65
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
673 / 1278
5.2.462 (RXLEV_DL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_DL_ZONE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules RXLEV_DL_ZONE RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Downlink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900": RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -71
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
674 / 1278
5.2.463 (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO) - (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Threshold on the downlink received level above which it is not necessary to trigger a handover on power budget (cause 12). Coded over 6 bits:0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
675 / 1278
5.2.464 (RXLEV_MIN_n) - (RXLEVmin(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RXLEV_MIN_n RXLEVmin(n)
Minimum level received from cell n to allow reception of handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
676 / 1278
5.2.465 (RXLEV_UL_IH) - (RXLEV_UL_IH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_UL_IH RXLEV_UL_IH
Uplink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell handover in case of bad uplink quality. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. RXLEV_UL_IH > L_RXLEV_UL_H Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -65
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
677 / 1278
5.2.466 (RXLEV_UL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_UL_ZONE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules RXLEV_UL_ZONE RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Uplink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900": RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -78
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
678 / 1278
5.2.467 (Schedule Period for Basic CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Schedule Period for Basic CBCH Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH
Length of the DRX schedule period for the basic CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit CBper Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 32
No No
679 / 1278
5.2.468 (Schedule period for Extended CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Schedule period for Extended CBCH Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH
Length of the DRX schedule period for the extended CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit CBper Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 32
No No
680 / 1278
5.2.469 (SDCCH_COUNTER) - (SDCCH_COUNTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_COUNTER SDCCH_COUNTER
Time during which SDCCH handovers are forbidden after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) SDCCH_COUNTER <= T_SDCCH_PC Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
External Comment
"0" means that SDCCH handover is immediately allowed after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. No No
681 / 1278
5.2.470 (SDCCH_HO) - (HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SDCCH_HO HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT
The flag inhibits/enables the execution of SDCCH handovers. 0: SDCCH HO enabled1: SDCCH HO disabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) disabled (1) * disabled (1) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
682 / 1278
5.2.471 (Send_CM_Enquiry) - (BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Send_CM_Enquiry BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY
Controls the trigger of Classmark Enquiry procedure at call establishment time. 0: the classmark enquiry is never initiated by the BSC; 1: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will always initiate a classmark enquiry; 2: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will initiate the classmark enquiry if algorithm A5/1 is not available (information available in MS classmark 1 IE sent in the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST). Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
683 / 1278
5.2.472 (Signalling Link Code) - (SLC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Signalling Link Code SLC
Signalling Link Code. Site (CAE) Reference BSC N7 ch Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 0
External Comment
684 / 1278
5.2.473 (SMSCB_Features_Set) - (SMSCB_Features_set)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Features_Set SMSCB_Features_set
This parameter indicates which features are usable with the SMSCB product. 1: Features set 1, 2: Features set 2 Can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE = "inactive". If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then CBC_Window shall be equal to "1"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then SMSCB_Recovery shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells Use_of_Extended_CBCH shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH shall be set to "0" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
External Comment
When migrating from FS1 to FS2, USE_OF_EXTENDED_CBCH shall be set to "Yes", CBC_WINDOW shall be set to 4. No No
685 / 1278
5.2.474 (SMSCB_Phase) - (SMSCB_Phase)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Phase SMSCB_Phase
This parameter indicates whether the feature operates in GSM Phase2 or Phase 2+ mode. 0: Phase 2, 1: Phase 2+ If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS1", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to "phase2" If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS2", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to "phase2+" SMSCB_Phase can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
686 / 1278
5.2.475 (SMSCB_Recovery) - (SMSCB_Recovery)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Recovery SMSCB_Recovery
This parameter indicates if the CBC accepts the recovery-indication in Restart-Indication message. 0: No, 1: Yes shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
687 / 1278
5.2.476 (SMSCB_State) - (SMSCB_State)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMSCB_State SMSCB_State
This flag indicates if the feature is activated or deactivated. 0: activated, 1: deactivated Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
688 / 1278
5.2.477 (Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2) - (STRIP_O5_CM2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2 STRIP_O5_CM2
This flag controls the format of the "Classmark 2" IE sent to the MSC. 0: no modification on "Classmark2" IE, 1: octet 5 of "Classmark2" IE is stripped out EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at the same time. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
689 / 1278
5.2.478 (SYNCHRONISED_HO) - (EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SYNCHRONISED_HO EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO
This flag enables/disables synchronous handovers between synchronized cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer". Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
690 / 1278
5.2.479 (T(conn est)) - (T(conn est))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(conn est) T(conn est)
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Connection Confirm message. step size = 0.5sec T(conn est) < T9105 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 127.5 Default 30
No No
691 / 1278
5.2.480 (T(iar)) - (T(iar))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T(iar) T(iar)
SCCP timer supervising the activity on SCCP connection. step size = 6sec Must be greater than T(ias) used by the MSC It is recommended to configure T(iar) > (2 x T(ias) used by the MSC) + 1 min Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 402 Maximum 1530 Default 1260
No No
692 / 1278
5.2.481 (T(ias)) - (T(ias))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T(ias) T(ias)
SCCP timer supervising the sending of Inactivity Test message. step size = 6sec Must be less than T(iar) used by the MSC It is recommended to configure T(ias) < (T(iar) used by the MSC - 1 min) / 2 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 96 Maximum 450 Default 300
No No
693 / 1278
5.2.482 (T(rel)) - (T(rel))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(rel) T(rel)
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Release Complete message. step size = 0.5sec, coded from 16 to 255, 16 == 8 sec, 255 == 127.5 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 8 Maximum 127.5 Default 15
Coding rules
No No
694 / 1278
5.2.483 (T(sst)) - (T(sst))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(sst) T(sst)
SCCP delay between sending of consecutive Subsystem Status Test messages. step size = 6sec For BSC Evolution, ALU highly recommends setting this timer to 6 seconds to improve the BSC robustness. Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 6 Maximum 1200 Default 30
No No
695 / 1278
5.2.484 (T_BIND_CNF) - (T_BIND_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BIND_CNF T_BIND_CNF
Maximum waiting time to get a response to a CBSE-BIND primitive. step size = 1 sec Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 300 Default 30
No No
696 / 1278
5.2.485 (T_BURST) - (T_BURST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_BURST T_BURST
Delay between consecutive bursts of BLOCK or UNBLOCK messages. step size =0.1 sec (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM < T1_short Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 2
697 / 1278
5.2.486 (T_HCP) - (T_HCP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_HCP T_HCP
Time during which PING_PONG_HCP is applied after handover. step size= 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 240 Default 0
No No
698 / 1278
5.2.487 (T_HO_REQD_LOST) - (T_HO_REQD_LOST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_HO_REQD_LOST T_HO_REQD_LOST
Supervision of the MSC response after sending of HANDOVER REQUIRED. step size = 1sec T_HO_REQD_LOST > T7 T_HO_REQD_LOST value shall be greater than the maximum time for external handover execution Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 6 Maximum 120 Default 30
Depends on MSC type No No
699 / 1278
5.2.488 (T_IA) - (T_IA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_IA T_IA
Indicates the maximum time a CS IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message remains in the AGCH queue. step size = 0.1sec T_IA<T3101 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 2.5
No No
700 / 1278
5.2.489 (T_INHIBIT_CPT) - (T_INHIBIT_CPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_INHIBIT_CPT T_INHIBIT_CPT
Time during which the HO Causes 14, 21, and 24 are inhibited. step size = 1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 240 Default 0
T_INHIBIT_CPT = 0 inhibits the anti ping-pong function. No No
701 / 1278
5.2.490 (T_MS_CELL_REJ) - (T_MS_CELL_REJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MS_CELL_REJ T_MS_CELL_REJ
Delay where the cells the MS failed to handover, cannot be selected as targets in subsequent handover attempts. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 5
No No
702 / 1278
5.2.491 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_CS T_PAG_CS (BSC)
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_CS (MFS) T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
No No
703 / 1278
5.2.492 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_CS T_PAG_CS (MFS)
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_CS (BSC) T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer) Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
No No
704 / 1278
5.2.493 (T_QHO) - (T_qho)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_QHO T_qho
Maximum queuing time for Handover Requests. step size = 1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 3
No No
705 / 1278
5.2.494 (T_SDCCH_PC) - (T_SDCCH_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_SDCCH_PC T_SDCCH_PC
Time during which power control on SDCCH is inhibited after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size = 1 (2 x Samfr) T_SDCCH_PC >= SDCCH_COUNTER Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 5
No No
706 / 1278
5.2.495 (T1) - (T1_short)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T1 T1_short
Supervision of the Blocking/Unblocking procedure. step size = 0.1sec T1_short > (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 25.5 Default 16
707 / 1278
5.2.496 (T11) - (T11)

Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests. step size = 1 s T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 19 Default 6
708 / 1278
5.2.497 (T11_FORCED) - (T11_FORCED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T11_FORCED T11_FORCED
Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests where queuing is not allowed by the MSC. step size = 0.1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 19 Default 4
709 / 1278
5.2.498 (T13) - (T13)

Delay for acknowledgement of RESET received from MSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
710 / 1278
5.2.499 (T17) - (T17)

Period of time where a new OVERLOAD that is received from the MSC, is not processed after reception of a processed OVERLOAD. step size: 0.1 sec T17 < T18_overload Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 30
No No
711 / 1278
5.2.500 (T18) - (T18)

Delay between consecutive debarring actions after a BSS outage. Step size: 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
No No
712 / 1278
5.2.501 (T18_OVERLOAD) - (T18_Overload)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T18_OVERLOAD T18_Overload
Delay between the latest MSC OVERLOAD message or DTC internal overload detection and debarring action. Also delay between consecutive debarring actions for overload procedure and Telecom global reset procedure. step size: 0.1 sec T18_OVERLOAD > T17 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
No No
713 / 1278
5.2.502 (T19) - (T19)

Supervision of the Reset Circuit procedure. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
714 / 1278
5.2.503 (T20) - (T20)

Supervision of Circuit Group Blocking procedure. step size=0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 25.5 Default 16
No No
715 / 1278
5.2.504 (T200 (BSC)) - (T200 (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T200 (BSC) T200 (BSC)
Supervision of acknowledgements. step size: 100ms; (1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 300ms, 4: 400ms, .. . , 10: 1000ms The recommended value for Abis via satellite is 1000 ms. Site (CAE) Timer BSC A-bis link Unit ms Minimum 300 Maximum 1000 Default 300
External Comment
The value of T200 (BSC) is driven by the associated Abis connection type. It can be changed indirectly from the OMC (through the change of Abis connection type) The default value 300 ms corresponds to Abis terrestrial link. No No
716 / 1278
5.2.505 (T200_TF) - (T200_TF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T200_TF T200_TF
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH FR associated) SAPI 0. Step size = 20 msec Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values): It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime. Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 5100 Default 200
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls established after modification. When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically added by the BTS.
No No
717 / 1278
5.2.506 (T200_TH) - (T200_TH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T200_TH T200_TH
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH HR associated) SAPI 0. step size = 20 msec. Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values): It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime. Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 180 Maximum 5100 Default 180
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls established after modification. When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically added by the BTS.
No No
718 / 1278
5.2.507 (T3101) - (T3101)

Supervision of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3101 > 2s Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
No No
719 / 1278
5.2.508 (T3103) - (T3103)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules T3103 T3103
Supervision of the Internal Handover procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_D. T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_FR. T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_HR. T3103 > T3106_D. T3103 > T3106_F Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 16.5
No No
720 / 1278
5.2.509 (T3105D) - (T3105_D)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105D T3105_D
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on SDCCH. T3105_D x Ny1 < T3103 T3105_D x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_D x Ny1 > T3124 T3105_D << T3124 (T3124 = 675 ms on SDCCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 220 Default 200
Recommended rules
No No
721 / 1278
5.2.510 (T3105D_STOP) - (T3105_D_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3105D_STOP T3105_D_STOP
Criterion to stop T3105_D timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
722 / 1278
5.2.511 (T3105F_FR) - (T3105_F_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105F_FR T3105_F_FR
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on FACCH for FR channels. T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T3103 T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_F_FR x Ny1 > T3124 T3105_F_FR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 250 Default 50
Recommended rules
No No
723 / 1278
5.2.512 (T3105F_HR) - (T3105_F_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105F_HR T3105_F_HR
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on FACCH for HR channels. T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T3103 T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_F_HR x Ny1 > T3124 T3105_F_HR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 250 Default 100
Recommended rules
No No
724 / 1278
5.2.513 (T3105F_STOP) - (T3105_F_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3105F_STOP T3105_F_STOP
Criterion to stop T3105_F timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
725 / 1278
5.2.514 (T3106D) - (T3106_D)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3106D T3106_D
Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target cell in case of SDCCH synchronous handover. T3106_D < T3103 T3106_D < T9113 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 1100 Maximum 1500 Default 1200
No No
726 / 1278
5.2.515 (T3106D_STOP) - (T3106_D_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3106D_STOP T3106_D_STOP
Criterion to stop T3106_D timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
727 / 1278
5.2.516 (T3106F) - (T3106_F)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3106F T3106_F
Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target cell in case of TCH synchronous handover. T3106_F < T3103 T3106_F < T9113 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 500 Maximum 1000 Default 1000
No No
728 / 1278
5.2.517 (T3106F_STOP) - (T3106_F_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3106F_STOP T3106_F_STOP
Criterion to stop T3106_F timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
729 / 1278
5.2.518 (T3107) - (T3107)

Supervision of the Assignment procedure. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
No No
730 / 1278
5.2.519 (T3109) - (T3109)

Supervision of the Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3109 > RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT + 1s Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 35 Default 12
No No
731 / 1278
5.2.520 (T3111) - (T3111)

Delay of the RF Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3111 > 2 x T200_D. T3111 > 2 x T200_TH. T3111 = T3110 (MS) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0.5
No No
732 / 1278
5.2.521 (T3212) - (T3212 (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3212 T3212 (BSC)
This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive Periodic Location Update procedures. 0: no periodic location update Equal to T3212 (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit 6 mn Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 30
No No
733 / 1278
5.2.522 (T4) - (T4)

Supervision of RESET message sent to the MSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
T4 shall be set greater than T2 (timer in MSC). No No
734 / 1278
5.2.523 (T7) - (T7)

Timer controlling the repetition of HANDOVER REQUIRED. step size = 0.1sec T7 < T_HO_REQD_LOST Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 5
735 / 1278
5.2.524 (T8) - (T8)

Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the serving BSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
No No
736 / 1278
5.2.525 (T9104) - (T9104)

Supervision of the call clearing procedure when triggered by the BSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 2
No No
737 / 1278
5.2.526 (T9105) - (T9105)

Supervision of the SCCP Connection procedure. step size = 0.1sec T9105 > T(conn est) T9105 > max T3210. T9105 > max T3220. T9105 > max T3230 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 11 Maximum 6553,5 Default 31
No No
738 / 1278
5.2.527 (T9112) - (T9112)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T9112 T9112
Supervision of the channel modification in the MS. step size = 0.1sec T9112 >= 15s. T9112 <= T9114. T9112 is inferior to the MSC timer supervising the Modify procedure. Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
No No
739 / 1278
5.2.528 (T9113) - (T9113)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules T9113 T9113
Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the target BSC. step size = 0.1sec T9113 > T3105_D x Ny1. T9113 > T3105_F x Ny1. T9113 > T3106_D. T9113 > T3106_F Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 20
No No
740 / 1278
5.2.529 (TA_STAT) - (TA_STAT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TA_STAT TA_STAT
Threshold on timing advance to define the cell limit used for Radio Measurements Statistics. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 8
1 bper corresponds to about 550m No No
741 / 1278
5.2.530 (TCH load threshold for Auto AC) - (N_threshold)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TCH load threshold for Auto AC N_threshold
Threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage for automatic barring of access classes. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
No No
742 / 1278
5.2.531 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TEMPORARY_OFFSET TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME. step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
External Comment
If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the provisioning context of the OMC. Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) infinity (7) infinity (7) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0)
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
743 / 1278
5.2.532 (TFO HR when loaded) - (FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TFO HR when loaded FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
Flag to control the establishment of TFO in Half Rate, when the cell is loaded and the call is currently allocated with an Half Rate codec type (HR or AMR-NB HR) for load reason. 0 : "TFO with Half Rate codec not forced", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, the BSC will propose to establish TFO with all the supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec). 1 : "TFO with Half Rate codec only", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, it will stay in Half Rate even in case of TFO mismatch situation (if TFO is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, TFO is not established). 2 : "TFO with Half Rate codec preferred", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, the BSC will propose in a first step to establish TFO providing only the supported Half Rate codecs only. If TFO is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, the BSC will try to establish TFO with all the supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec), provided that EN_TFO_MATCH=1. If FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED=2, EN_TFO_MATCH should be set to 1 Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
When the call is currently allocated with AMR-NB HR for load reason and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO on AMR-NB supported by the TC and configured in the cell), then the BSC automatically behaviors as "TFO with Half Rate codec only", and set the list of the supported codec types according to the ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST parameter. No No
744 / 1278
5.2.533 (THR_CCCH_LOAD) - (THR_CCCH_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CCCH_LOAD THR_CCCH_LOAD
Threshold triggering the sending of CCCH LOAD INDICATION message. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 100 Maximum 3000 Default 500
No No
745 / 1278
5.2.534 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Lower load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR codec type in a dual rate cell. step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 & THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
No
746 / 1278
5.2.535 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Lower load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and Cause 27) in a dual rate cell. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 & THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
No
747 / 1278
5.2.536 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Higher load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR codec type in a dual rate cell. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 & THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
No
748 / 1278
5.2.537 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Higher load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and Cause 27) in a dual rate cell. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 & THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
No
749 / 1278
5.2.538 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under high load (Cause 26 and Cause 27). step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70) THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
750 / 1278
5.2.539 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under normal load (Cause 26 and Cause 27). step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70) THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
751 / 1278
5.2.540 (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD) - (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Periodicity of traffic load update in resource allocation algorithms = N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD. Site (CAE) Timer OMC cell Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 3264 Default 120
External Comment
The given default value corresponds to the value calculated by the OMC, based on the values of N_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value), A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value), TCH_INFO_PERIOD. No No
752 / 1278
5.2.541 (TRX zone) - (ZONE_TYPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRX zone ZONE_TYPE
Determines which TRX(s) belong to the inner zone and which TRX(s) belong to the outer zone of a concentric cell. Coded as a 16 bits bitmap. Each bit specifies the zone the corresponding TRX (if declared) belongs to. 0: Outer zone, 1: Inner zone. Site (CAE) Bitmap BSC TRX Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
753 / 1278
5.2.542 (TRX_CIPH_CAP) - (TRX_CIPH_CAP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRX_CIPH_CAP TRX_CIPH_CAP
Indicates the ciphering algorithms supported by the TRX in TDM mode and in IP mode. The first byte indicates the ciphering capability in TDM mode. The second byte indicates the ciphering capability in IP mode. Each byte is coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if corresponding encryption algorithm is permitted. Bit x=0 : encryption algorithm not supported Bit x=1 : encryption algorithm supported bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering) bit 1 : A5/1. bit 2 : A5/2 bit 3 : A5/3 bit 4 : A5/4 ... bit 7 : A5/7.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
The possible values for each byte are : - A5/0 + A5/1 - A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3 Site (CAE) Bitmap BSC TRX Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 771
External Comment
A5/2 is not supported by the BSS. Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here (A5/0 + A5/1 for both mode) is for implementation purposes. No No
754 / 1278
5.2.543 (TSC) - (TSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TSC TSC
Training Sequence Code for any (packet) channel except for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH coded over 3 bits Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. Two training sequence codes are used in Alcatel BSS: *) TSC for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH: the BSS sets the TSC to the O&M parameter BCC. This behaviour is compliant to 3GPP TS 05.02 which states that for BCCH and CCCH, the TSC must be equal to the BCC. In Alcatel BSS, for CBCH, the TSC is also set to BCC. **) TSC for any other (packet) channel: the BSS sets the TSC to the O&M parameter TSC.
No No
755 / 1278
5.2.544 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INTEGER Tx_integer (BSC)
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111 Equal to Tx_integer (MFS) When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF =0 TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1. When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH. The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2 successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the CCCH configuration as shown below: 1) for non combined CCCH: - Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms) - Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms) - Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms) - Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms) Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms) 2) for combined CCCH: - Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms) - Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms) - Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms) - Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms) - Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms) Note: - In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH frames per 51-multiframe - In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames per 51-multiframe.
Coding rules
Category Type SubSystem
Site (CAE) Number BSC
756 / 1278
Instance Value
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF =0 TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1 No No
757 / 1278
5.2.545 (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Downlink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover. coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -91 dBm (19) N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
758 / 1278
5.2.546 (U_RXLEV_DL_P) - (U_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_DL_P U_RXLEV_DL_P
Upper downlink level threshold for power control. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm U_RXLEV_DL_P > L_RXLEV_DL_P U_RXLEV_DL_P >= L_RXLEV_DL_P + 10 dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -75
No No
759 / 1278
5.2.547 (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Uplink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -98 dBm (12) N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
760 / 1278
5.2.548 (U_RXLEV_UL_P) - (U_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_UL_P U_RXLEV_UL_P
Upper uplink level threshold for power control. coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm U_RXLEV_UL_P > L_RXLEV_UL_P U_RXLEV_UL_P >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + 10 dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -75
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
761 / 1278
5.2.549 (U_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXQUAL_DL_P U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Upper downlink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) U_RXQUAL_DL_P < L_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
Highest value is the worst quality No No
762 / 1278
5.2.550 (U_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXQUAL_UL_P U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Upper uplink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) U_RXQUAL_UL_P < L_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
Highest value is the worst quality No No
763 / 1278
5.2.551 (UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (U_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE U_TIME_ADVANCE
Timing Advance threshold for distance handover. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 63
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 1 km (2) 35 km (63) 34.5 km (62) 35 km (63)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
764 / 1278
5.2.552 (VQ_AVERAGE) - (VQ_AVERAGE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_AVERAGE VQ_AVERAGE
Average window size on measurements to obtain samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1 Samfr Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 128 Default 6
External Comment
Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS tempates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
765 / 1278
5.2.553 (VQ_BAD_RXFER) - (VQ_BAD_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_BAD_RXFER VQ_BAD_RXFER
Radio bad FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 3
External Comment
766 / 1278
5.2.554 (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_FER_THRESHOLD VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Radio FER threshold to detect calls with bad speech quality for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 30
External Comment
767 / 1278
5.2.555 (VQ_GOOD_RXFER) - (VQ_GOOD_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_GOOD_RXFER VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Radio good FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 1
External Comment
768 / 1278
5.2.556 (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Radio interference threshold to detect noisy calls for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 30
External Comment
769 / 1278
5.2.557 (VQ_RXLEV) - (VQ_RXLEV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXLEV VQ_RXLEV
Radio level threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. 0 = -110 dBm, 1 = -109 dBm, 62 = -48 dBm, 63 = -47 dBm, step = 1dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -95
Coding rules
External Comment
770 / 1278
5.2.558 (VQ_RXQUAL) - (VQ_RXQUAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXQUAL VQ_RXQUAL
Radio quality threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
External Comment
771 / 1278
5.2.559 (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER) - (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Radio quality threshold to specify correlation between quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
External Comment
772 / 1278
5.2.560 (W_LEV_HO) - (W_LEV_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_HO W_LEV_HO
Weight applicable to level samples for handover when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
773 / 1278
5.2.561 (W_LEV_MCHO) - (W_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_MCHO W_LEV_MCHO
Weight applicable to level samples for microcell handover when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
774 / 1278
5.2.562 (W_LEV_PC) - (W_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_PC W_LEV_PC
Weight applicable to level samples for power control when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
775 / 1278
5.2.563 (W_PBGT_HO) - (W_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_PBGT_HO W_PBGT_HO
Weight applicable to level samples for power budget when no DTX is applied. A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
776 / 1278
5.2.564 (W_QUAL_CA) - (W_QUAL_CA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value W_QUAL_CA W_QUAL_CA
Averaging weight applicable for full quality (Channel adaptation). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
777 / 1278
5.2.565 (W_QUAL_HO) - (W_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_QUAL_HO W_QUAL_HO
Weight applicable to quality samples for handover when no DTX is applied. A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
778 / 1278
5.2.566 (W_QUAL_PC) - (W_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_QUAL_PC W_QUAL_PC
Weight applicable to quality samples for power control when no DTX is applied. A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
No No
779 / 1278
5.2.567 (WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING) - (MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING
This flag indicates if the BSC sends a Q.704 TRA message upon first reception of SLTA from the MSC. 0 : TRA not sent upon first SLTA reception, 1 : TRA sent upon first SLTA reception Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- This flag is set to 1 for interworking with a "White Book" MSC. It is set to 0 for interworking with a "Blue Book" MSC. - Parameter change: after modification, a BSC restart procedure is needed. On going calls are not disrupted (as long as no new signalling exchange is needed) but the new traffic is not accepted during that procedure. No No
780 / 1278
5.2.568 (WI_CR) - (WI_CR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WI_CR WI_CR
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Call Re-establishment". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
Coding rules
No No
781 / 1278
5.2.569 (WI_EC) - (WI_EC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules WI_EC WI_EC
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Emergency call". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 2
No No
782 / 1278
5.2.570 (WI_OC) - (WI_OC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules WI_OC WI_OC
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Originating call". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
No No
783 / 1278
5.2.571 (WI_OP) - (WI_OP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WI_OP WI_OP
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Location updating" or "Other procedures which can be completed with an SDCCH". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
Coding rules
No No
784 / 1278
5.2.572 (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ZONE_HO_HYST_DL ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_DL_ZONE for outer to inner zone handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -40 Maximum 40 Default 6
No No
785 / 1278
5.2.573 (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ZONE_HO_HYST_UL ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_UL_ZONE for outer to inner zone handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -40 Maximum 40 Default 6
No No
786 / 1278
5.3 System (CST)

5.3.1 (Interference band 5 upper limit) - (INTFBD5)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Interference band 5 upper limit INTFBD5
Upper limit of interference band 5. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm System (CST) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
No No
787 / 1278
5.3.2 (SMSCB_Mode) - (SMSCB_Mode)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Mode SMSCB_Mode
This parameter enables to select the mode of operation, either OMC-R or CBC. 0: OMC-R, 1: CBC System (CST) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
788 / 1278
6 GPRS Telecom Parameters
789 / 1278
6.1 Network (CDE)

6.1.1 (BSSGP_T3) - (bssgp_T3)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSSGP_T3 bssgp_T3
Timer used by MFS to wait for Suspend acknowledgement from SGSN. 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10 Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.6
No No
790 / 1278
6.1.2 (BSSGP_T4) - (bssgp_T4)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSSGP_T4 bssgp_T4
Timer used by MFS to wait for Resume acknowledgement from SGSN. 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10 BSSGP_T4 < T_GPRS_Resume/ (Resume_retries+1)) Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.6
No No
791 / 1278
6.1.3 (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
This flag enables / disables autonomous rerouting of DL LLC PDUs. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
792 / 1278
6.1.4 (EN_CBL) - (EN_CBL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_CBL EN_CBL
This flag enables / disables CBL feature (Leaky Bucket Synchronisation) 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
793 / 1278
6.1.5 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Safety factor to size BVC_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow control, on Gb interface. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 20
No No
794 / 1278
6.1.6 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Safety factor to size default MS_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow control, on Gb interface. step size = 0.1 FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS should be set to a value corresponding to the maximum multi-slot class of the MS present on the network Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 5
No No
795 / 1278
6.1.7 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF
Threshold to enter the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling message storage). GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON Network (CDE) Threshold MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
No No
796 / 1278
6.1.8 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON
Threshold to exit the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling message storage). GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON Network (CDE) Threshold MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 50
No No
797 / 1278
6.1.9 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2
Threshold defining the second level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling message storage). GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF > GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON Network (CDE) Threshold MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 90
No No
798 / 1278
6.1.10 (K_GSL (BSC)) - (K_GSL (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules K_GSL (BSC) K_GSL (BSC)
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links: - K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS. - K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 7
No No
799 / 1278
6.1.11 (K_GSL (MFS)) - (K_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules K_GSL (MFS) K_GSL (MFS)
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links: - K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS. - K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 7
No No
800 / 1278
6.1.12 (MAX_BLER) - (MAX_BLER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_BLER MAX_BLER
Maximum mean BLER value that a TBF can possibly reach step size = 0,05 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 0.95 Default 0.35
External Comment
The MAX_BLER value is used by RRM to evaluate the minimum number of GCHs necessary to support RT traffic on a TRX. No No
801 / 1278
6.1.13 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC) (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Number of bytes above which a transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer shall be periodically reattempted (only useful in the rare cases where such a transition previously failed). step size = 100 bytes N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <= N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit byte Minimum 100 Maximum 100000 Default 10000
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - A transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer can only fail in the rare cases where there is a too high number of TBFs on the TRX / in some very specific reallocation failure scenarios. A low value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC should be avoided because it will tend to increase the CPU load of the MFS for a defence case which should be rare (if TRX and Abis/Ater transmission resources are properly dimensioned). No No
802 / 1278
6.1.14 (N391) - (N391)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N391 N391
Number of polling cycles before Frame Relay " full status enquiry" (see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7). Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 6
No No
803 / 1278
6.1.15 (N392) - (N392)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N392 N392
Error threshold (Frame Relay, see Q.933, Annex A). N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 3
No No
804 / 1278
6.1.16 (N393) - (N393)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N393 N393
Monitored error counts (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7). Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 4
No No
805 / 1278
6.1.17 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
In a G2 BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link. The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 20
Applicable only to TDM mode. No No
806 / 1278
6.1.18 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
In an Evolution BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link. The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 84
807 / 1278
6.1.19 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
In a G2 BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests can again be sent on this GSL link. The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 10
808 / 1278
6.1.20 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
In an Evolution BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests can again be sent on this GSL link. The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 52
Applicable only to TDM mode No No
809 / 1278
6.1.21 (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN) - (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
For a PDCH, percentage of channel capacity (in terms of radio block scheduling) which is exclusively reserved to NRT TBFs. That capacity is not allowed to be allocated to a streaming TBF (RT PFC). step size = 1% Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 7
External Comment
In each direction (DL or UL), the minimum number of NRT TBFs which are possible (in all cases) to be established on a PDCH is equal to ((NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN/100) * (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING/20ms)) rounded down to the closest integer value. This minimum number of NRT TBFs is guaranteed even in case of RT PFC allocation on the PDCH. The higher the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher the risks of rejecting RT PFC creation requests. The lower the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher the risks of rejecting NRT TBF establishment requests (signalling or data traffic).
No No
810 / 1278
6.1.22 (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER) - (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Authorize or inhibit DL LLC PDU ordering according to the remaining PDU lifetime. 0: ordering disabled, 1 : ordering enabled Should be set to "ordering disabled", when the MFS interfaces with an Ericsson SGSN or any SGSN modifying the PDU Lifetime value during data flows addressed to the same MS on the same LLC SAPI in a non-acceptable manner, otherwise should be set to "ordering enabled". Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
811 / 1278
6.1.23 (S_BECN) - (S_BECN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition S_BECN S_BECN
Number of consecutive frames with BECN bit before congestion is stated. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 8
No No
812 / 1278
6.1.24 (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR) (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
When computing the best candidate timeslot allocation for an NRT TBF, this factor enables to give a higher weight (PDCH capacity) to the already-established NRT TBFs having a higher scheduling priority (combination of THP and of Precedence) than the TBF to be established or reallocated. This factor will tend to avoid piling up several TBFs with different scheduling priorities on the same PDCHs, which would degrade the throughput of the low-priority TBFs. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
External Comment
The higher the value of T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING is, the higher the value of SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR shall be, in order to avoid degrading the throughput of the low-priority TBFs in a significant manner (if it is possible according to the available PDCHs in the cell). No No
813 / 1278
6.1.25 (T_ACK_WAIT) - (T_ACK_WAIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ACK_WAIT T_ACK_WAIT
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for an MS answer (i.e. Packet Control Ack or beginning of an UL TBF) to a network solicitation sent on PACCH/DL when the MS is in PTM, or on PPCH when the MS is in PIM and non-DRX mode, or on main DCCH when the MS is in dedicated mode. step size = 0.1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T_ack_wait = 1200 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS. - T_ack_wait = 1700 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM). - T_ack_wait = 2300 ms if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least one cell of the MFS and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all the corresponding BTS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 5 Default 1.2
No No
814 / 1278
6.1.26 (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH) - (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for a MS answer (i.e. Packet Control Ack) to a network sollicitation sent on PPCH when the MS is in PIM and DRX mode. step size = 0.1 sec ; 0 = 0; 1 = 0.1;... ;100 = 10 It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 2.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS, - T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 3 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2.5
No No
815 / 1278
6.1.27 (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC) (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Timer value controlling the time duration between successive resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs (triggers T3 and T4). In a given cell, at each expiry of the T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC timer : - up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4 reallocation attempts are performed, - up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4 reallocations are performed, - up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3 T3 reallocation attempts are performed, - up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 T3 reallocations are performed. step size = 1 sec; value 1 means 1 sec; value 2 means 2 sec, and so on T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the cells of the BSS. This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the T3 and T4 reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are currently unused, but still established. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 20 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
This parameter, together with the parameters N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3, N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 and N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4, allows to : - to control the reactivity of the BSS with regards to T3 and T4 reallocations, - and to control the extra CPU load generated by T3 and T4 reallocation attempts (the lowest the value of T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC, the highest the generated CPU load).
816 / 1278
No No
817 / 1278
6.1.28 (T_GCH_release) - (Trelease)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules T_GCH_release Trelease
Supervision of GCH link release for 16k channel. step size = 100 ms Trelease > Tdsl Treq_pending > Trelease It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - Trelease = 500 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS, - Trelease = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1200 Default 500
Recommended rules
External Comment
HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Trelease. No No
818 / 1278
6.1.29 (T_GPRS_Resume) - (T_GPRS_Resume)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GPRS_Resume T_GPRS_Resume
Timer used by BSC, to wait for Resume acknowledgement from SGSN before releasing the CS channel. step size = 0.1 sec, coded from 2 to 50 T_GPRS_Resume < T3240 (10s) T_GPRS_Resume > (BSSGP_T4 * (Resume_retries+1)) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links: - T_GPRS_RESUME = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS, - T_GPRS_RESUME = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.
Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.2 Maximum 5 Default 1
T3240 is a MS timer see 3GPP TS 24.008 No No
819 / 1278
6.1.30 (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING) (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Maximum time between two scheduling of a given NRT TBF (either between two DL block requests for a NRT DL TBF, or between two UL blocks received for a given NRT UL TBF). step size = 20 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.12 Maximum 0.3 Default 0.3
No No
820 / 1278
6.1.31 (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE) (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
This timer controls the duration during which a MS context is kept after receipt of a FLUSH-LL. step size = 100 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1000
No No
821 / 1278
6.1.32 (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD) (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
This timer controls the maximum time during which a GPU waits for the response to a rerouting request. step size = 50 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 50 Maximum 2000 Default 500
No No
822 / 1278
6.1.33 (T_ul_2_ph_access) - (T_One_Block)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ul_2_ph_access T_One_Block
Timer to postpone the release of the M-EGCH link of a TRX, when the TRX does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink block has been allocated to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishment on one of the RTSs of the TRX step size = 1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T_one_block = 4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS, - T_one_block = 5 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM). - T_one_block = 6 s if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least one cell of the MFS and and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all the corresponding BTS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 10 Default 4
No No
823 / 1278
6.1.34 (T_ul_access_max) - (T_ul_access_max)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_ul_access_max T_ul_access_max
Timer to limit the duration of an UL TBF establishment. step size = 50 ms, 0 = 0 ms, 1 = 50 ms,... , 100 = 5000 ms The two following rules are recommended: i) The Time T_ul_access_max shall be longer than the duration of a radio allocation requested towards the BSC. ii) A too long value of T_ul_access_max may lead to reserve unnecessarily radio resources. It is recommended to set T_ul_access_max = T_repeat + 240 ms Round_Trip_Delay, where the T_Repeat is the maximum time between two successive packet channel requests, 240 ms is a given margin. The value of T_Repeat depends on the parameters S, TX_INT, and TX_INTEGER. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending on whether or not GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms): - T_ul_access_max = 1400 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in at least one cell of the MFS (and this is irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = TDM or IP or mixed mode), - T_ul_access_max = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links in all the cells of the MFS (and this is irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = TDM or IP or mixed mode).
Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1400
No No
824 / 1278
6.1.35 (T_WAIT_FLUSH) - (T_WAIT_FLUSH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_FLUSH T_WAIT_FLUSH
Timer monitoring the receipt of a Flush message or a GPRS suspend message further to the release of the on-going TBF(s) Step size : 0.5 sec 1 coded 1; 1,5 coded 2; 2 coded 3; 2,5 coded 4; .... 15,5 coded 30 and 16 coded 31 The timer T_WAIT_FLUSH shall be set to the maximum cell reselection duration plus the time for the MS to switch back to the old cell and send a Packet Cell Change Failure message. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 10
Coding rules
No No
825 / 1278
6.1.36 (T1) - (bssgp_T1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T1 bssgp_T1
Guards the (un)blocking procedures. step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 3
No No
826 / 1278
6.1.37 (T2) - (bssgp_T2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T2 bssgp_T2
Guards the reset procedure. step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
No No
827 / 1278
6.1.38 (T200_GSL (MFS)) - (T200_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T200_GSL (MFS) T200_GSL (MFS)
Supervision of acknowledgements on the GSL link. T_GSL_Ack (MFS) > T200_GSL (MFS) * (1 + N200_GSL (MFS)) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links: - T200_GSL(MFS) = 1 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS. - T200_GSL(MFS) = 2 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
No No
828 / 1278
6.1.39 (T391) - (T391)

Link integrity verification polling timer (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933, Annex A, A.7). N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 30 Default 10
No No
829 / 1278
6.1.40 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number of DL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX). step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 5 Default 1
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network (delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow to increase this limit, so to be more flexible. Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL TBF numbers may be different. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL (RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the induced extra CPU load). No No
830 / 1278
6.1.41 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number of UL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX). step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 5 Default 1
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network (delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow to increase this limit, so to be more flexible. Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL TBF numbers may be different. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL (RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the induced extra CPU load). No No
831 / 1278
6.1.42 (TnsBlock) - (Tns_block)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsBlock Tns_block
Time-out to trigger the block/unblock procedure. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
No No
832 / 1278
6.1.43 (TnsReset) - (Tns_reset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsReset Tns_reset
Time-out for reset procedure. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
No No
833 / 1278
6.1.44 (TnsTest) - (Tns_test)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsTest Tns_test
Overall time-out to test an NS-VC. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 60 Default 15
No No
834 / 1278
6.1.45 (Treq_pending) - (Treq_pending)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Treq_pending Treq_pending
Maximum time during which a GCH establishment or release request from PMU can be delayed in MEGCH layer. step size = 20 ms Treq_pending > Trelease+Tcorr Treq_pending > Testab+Tcorr Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 1000 Maximum 5200 Default 2000
No No
835 / 1278
6.2 Site (CAE)

6.2.1 (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE) - (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ACCESS_BURST_TYPE ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Format of the access burst used by (E)GPRS MSs when sending a PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST, a PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT or a PTCCH/U message. 0 : 8 bits access bursts, 1 : 11 bits access bursts A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same ACCESS_BURST_TYPE when they are PS capable. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
836 / 1278
6.2.2 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Allowed priority classes PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority class is allowed to do Packet access. Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access not allowed in the cell; 011:packet access allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4 Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 6
Coding rules
No No
837 / 1278
6.2.3 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Allowed priority classes PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority class is allowed to do a Packet access. Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access is not allowed in the cell; 011:packet access is allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access is allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access is allowed for priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4 Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 6
Coding rules
External Comment
Persistence level parameter for priority (i) is meaningless if the Radio Priority (i) is not allowed No No
838 / 1278
6.2.4 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALPHA ALPHA (BSC)
Alpha power control parameter. Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010 Equal to ALPHA (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
839 / 1278
6.2.5 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALPHA ALPHA (MFS)
Alpha power control parameter. Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010 Equal to ALPHA (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
840 / 1278
6.2.6 (Ater_Usage_Threshold) - (Ater_Usage_Threshold)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Ater_Usage_Threshold Ater_Usage_Threshold
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which the Ater usage is said "high". A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same moment in the GPU). Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU). For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data <= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons, "short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater usage optimizations. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 70
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - When the Ater usage is "high", the GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage is applied, whereas when the Ater usage is "normal" (i.e. percentage of used Ater nibbles is below the threshold), no GCH reduction factor is applied. Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established after modification.
No No
841 / 1278
6.2.7 (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data) (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which the Ater usage is optimized for "short data" MS transfers. If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100% (100% meaning that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers), then it is recommended to set it to 30%, except if the drawbacks of another value (as explained in the external comments) are deemed acceptable. For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data <= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons, "short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater usage optimizations. If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.
Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Setting Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data to 100% means that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers. If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100%: - the higher the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the fewer ping time degradations and data transfer delays will be experienced, - the lower the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the more accurate the Ater consumption in the GPU will be (i.e. potential wastes of Ater resources will be minimized in the GPU). Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established after modification.
842 / 1278
No No
843 / 1278
6.2.8 (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY) - (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined Best Effort Packet Flow Context, and for all MS traffic without PFC Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 12
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the priority for interactive THP3. The minimum value (the highest priority) corresponds to one priority level below the streaming class. No No
844 / 1278
6.2.9 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS)
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel (AGCH), broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment. coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7) -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given cell -when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell, BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0 - when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell. -When EN_VGCS is disabled : . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1 -When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
External Comment
- Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0 - For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1 - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed). No No
845 / 1278
6.2.10 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_CV_MAX BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered. One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed. Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111). Equal to BS_CV_MAX (MFS) BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged blocks and minimise window-stalled situations. If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 9
External Comment
Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases and reestablishments. No No
846 / 1278
6.2.11 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_CV_MAX BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered. One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed. Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111). Equal to BS_CV_MAX (BSC) BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged blocks and minimise window-stalled situations. If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 9
External Comment
Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases and reestablishments. No No
847 / 1278
6.2.12 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PA_MFRMS BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS)
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences of a Paging Group, broadcast on the PBCCH for the CS service establishment. coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9) BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 9 Default 5
External Comment
848 / 1278
6.2.13 (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PAG_BLKS_RES BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Number of blocks allocated to the PAGCH or PDTCH or PACCH per 52 multiframe. coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, ..., 1010: 10) The codepoints 0000: 0, 1011: 11 and 1100: 12 are not supported by the ALCATEL BSS. BS_PAG_BLKS_RES < 12 BS_PBCCH_BLKS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
Coding rules
External Comment
According to 3GPP TS 05.02, the number of paging blocks "available" on one PCCCH = (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) * 64. In order for the network to be able to page GPRS-attached Mobile Stations when PCCCH is present in the cell, there shall be at least one radio block where paging can occur. This requires (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES BS_PBCCH_BLKS) to be strictly greater than 0. No No
849 / 1278
6.2.14 (BS_PBCCH_BLKS) - (BS_PBCCH_BLKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules BS_PBCCH_BLKS BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Number of blocks allocated to the PBCCH per 52 multiframe. coded on 2 bits : 00=Block B0 used for PBCCH, 01=Block B0, B6 used for PBCCH, 10=Block B0, B6, B3 used for PBCCH, 11=Block B0, B6, B3, B9 used for PBCCH BS_PBCCH_BLKS < 12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 4
No No
850 / 1278
6.2.15 (BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN) - (BS_PRACH_BLKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN BS_PRACH_BLKS
Number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each MPDCH. coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, .., 1000: 8) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 2
No No
851 / 1278
6.2.16 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS. It is always set to 0 by the OMC. A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead. step size = 2dB 0 0 0 0 = 0 dB, 0 0 0 1 = -2 dB, 0 0 1 0 = -4 dB, ..., 1 1 1 1 = -30 dB Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation). No No
852 / 1278
6.2.17 (BVCI) - (PTP_BVCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PTP BVCI value. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent No No Minimum 2 Maximum 65535 Default # BVCI PTP_BVCI
853 / 1278
6.2.18 (C31_HYST) - (C31_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition C31_HYST C31_HYST
Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall be applied to the C31 criterion. The hysteresis is GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (for NC0 mode). 0 : no, 1 : yes Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
854 / 1278
6.2.19 (C32_QUAL) - (C32_QUAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition C32_QUAL C32_QUAL
Flag indicating an exception rule for GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET in NC0 mode. 0=NO, 1=YES Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
855 / 1278
6.2.20 (Capacity) - (ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Capacity ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Physical access rate of the Frame Relay bearer channel. CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC) Site (CAE) Number OMC BC Unit kbit/s Minimum 64 Maximum 1984 Default 64
No No
856 / 1278
6.2.21 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
No No
857 / 1278
6.2.22 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
No No
858 / 1278
6.2.23 (CI) - (CI (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Cell Identity. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Equal to CI (BSC) Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None External Comment Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535 CI CI (MFS)
859 / 1278
6.2.24 (CI) - (CI(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CI CI(n) (MFS)
Cell Identity of adjacent cell. Values 0..65535 correspond to the standard CI-value. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time. Equal to CI(n)(BSC). Site (CAE) Reference MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
860 / 1278
6.2.25 (Commited Burst Size) - (CBS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Commited Burst Size CBS
Commited Burst Size. CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0 CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbyte Minimum 0 Maximum 248 Default 0
No No
861 / 1278
6.2.26 (Committed Information Rate) - (CIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Committed Information Rate CIR
Committed Information Rate. CIR=0 when "direct access" is used, CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0 CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 1984 Default 0
No No
862 / 1278
6.2.27 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
"Forgetting time" in the long term averaging of channel quality measurements in the GPRS link Adaptation: measurements which are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT are negligible in the average of channel quality measurements. step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.02 Maximum 5 Default 2
External Comment
Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service. The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic is accepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted. No No
863 / 1278
6.2.28 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
"Forgetting time" in the short term averaging of channel quality measurements in the GPRS link adaptation: measurements which are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST are negligible in the average of channel quality measurements. step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.02 Maximum 5 Default 0.32
External Comment
864 / 1278
6.2.29 (CS_BLER_DL_3_4) - (CS_BLER_DL_3_4)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_BLER_DL_3_4 CS_BLER_DL_3_4
CS3 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 5
No No
865 / 1278
6.2.30 (CS_BLER_DL_4_3) - (CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_BLER_DL_4_3 CS_BLER_DL_4_3
CS4 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15
No No
866 / 1278
6.2.31 (CS_HST_DL_LT) - (CS_HST_DL_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_DL_LT CS_HST_DL_LT
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0.5
No No
867 / 1278
6.2.32 (CS_HST_DL_ST) - (CS_HST_DL_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_DL_ST CS_HST_DL_ST
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 1.5
No No
868 / 1278
6.2.33 (CS_HST_UL_LT) - (CS_HST_UL_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_UL_LT CS_HST_UL_LT
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the uplink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0.5
No No
869 / 1278
6.2.34 (CS_HST_UL_ST) - (CS_HST_UL_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_UL_ST CS_HST_UL_ST
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the uplink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 1.5
No No
870 / 1278
6.2.35 (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Maximum transfer inactivity time to reuse the previous (Modulation and) Coding Scheme. This applies in case of transfer resumption during inactive TBF phase (delayed downlink TBF mode / extended uplink TBF mode) and in case of uplink TBF establishment on PACCH while extended uplink TBF mode is not used (with some additional restrictions). step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 680
This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs. No No
871 / 1278
6.2.36 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 6
No No
872 / 1278
6.2.37 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
No No
873 / 1278
6.2.38 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 5
No No
874 / 1278
6.2.39 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
No No
875 / 1278

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
No No
876 / 1278

No No
877 / 1278

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3.5
No No
878 / 1278

No No
879 / 1278

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
No No
880 / 1278

No No
881 / 1278

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
No No
882 / 1278

No No
883 / 1278
6.2.48 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 6
No No
884 / 1278
6.2.49 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
No No
885 / 1278
6.2.50 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 5
No No
886 / 1278
6.2.51 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
No No
887 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
No No
888 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 2
No No
889 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3.5
No No
890 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 2
No No
891 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
No No
892 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
893 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
No No
894 / 1278

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
895 / 1278
6.2.60 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 14
No No
896 / 1278
6.2.61 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
897 / 1278
6.2.62 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 13
No No
898 / 1278
6.2.63 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
899 / 1278
6.2.64 (CS_SIR_HST_DL) - (CS_SIR_HST_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_HST_DL CS_SIR_HST_DL
Signal to Interference Ratio hysteresis used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in the downlink direction. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 1
No No
900 / 1278
6.2.65 (Data Link Connection Identifier) - (DLCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI
Data Link Connection Identifier, corresponds to a PVC identifier, see Q.922 Annex A, Table 1. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit None Minimum 16 Maximum 991 Default None
No No
901 / 1278
6.2.66 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DRX_TIMER_MAX DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode after packet transfer mode. Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111 ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL BSS. Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 2
Coding rules
No No
902 / 1278
6.2.67 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DRX_TIMER_MAX DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode after packet transfer mode. Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111 ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL BSS. Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 2
Coding rules
No No
903 / 1278
6.2.68 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)
Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS for MS in Packet Transfer Mode. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC) = EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS) - can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and (round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS) - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled. - if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS, either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled" (network_operation_mode <> NMO I). - if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS = false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
External Comment
The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface" feature. No No
904 / 1278
6.2.69 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)
Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS for MS in Packet Transfer Mode. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS) = EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC) - can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and (round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS) - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled. - if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS, either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled" (network_operation_mode <> NMO I). - if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS = false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
External Comment
The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface" feature. No No
905 / 1278
6.2.70 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC acknowledged mode. 0: Disable; 1: Enable If EN_STREAMING = 1 then it is recommended to set EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK to "TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio interface. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
906 / 1278
6.2.71 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC unacknowledged 0: Disable; 1: Enable Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
907 / 1278
6.2.72 (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING) (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
This flag enables / disables rerouting of DL LLC PDUs. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
This parameter locks only the rerouting part of the feature. It has no effect on the securisation part. This parameter applies to both, intra-NSE and inter-NSE cell change. No No
908 / 1278
6.2.73 (EN_EGPRS) - (EN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_EGPRS EN_EGPRS
Enables/Disables EGPRS traffic in the cell. 0: Disable, 1: Enable EN_EGPRS = enable only if MAX_PDCH > 0. If EN_EGPRS is set to enable, Alcatel recommend to set the parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX to 0. In case of extended cell, Alcatel recommend to set the same value in both, inner and outer, cells. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
From system point of view, when EN_EGPRS = Enable, the highest MCS allowed on the TRX is defined by the current size of the M-EGCH link of the TRX and by the MAX_EGPRS_MCS value. No No
909 / 1278
6.2.74 (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) - (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Flag to disable/enable the extended TBF mode feature on the uplink (without or with allowing the MS not to answer to a USF received while in Extended UL TBF mode). 0: Extended UL TBF mode (EUTM) is not used 1: EUTM is used 2: I-EUTM is used (improved EUTM mode) -It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) - if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and if RA capability update is supported by SGSN, then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must be enabled. The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
I-EUTM (improved EUTM) allow MS in EUTM mode to not answer to a USF. In I-EUTM mode, N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT and IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD parameters can be used to tune the radio link monitoring. No No
910 / 1278
6.2.75 (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS) (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
This flag indicates whether or not one Slave PDCH is available for (E)GPRS traffic in the cell (fast initial PS access feature). In an Evolium BTS, that corresponds to a PDCH being able to support incoming (E)GPRS traffic, that PDCH being located on an established TRX (i.e. the TRX owns an M-EGCH link) 0: disabled, 1: enabled - MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; - MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled. - If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, then EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
Better performances for service access time will be obtained when this parameter is set to enabled, but one PDCH will always be established in the cell. A compromise has to be made by the operator between performance gain and the cost of radio and terrestrial resources. This compromise becomes of higher importance in case of a cell connected through a satellite link due to the higher GPRS access time with satellite links, but also the higher cost of transmission links. No No
911 / 1278
6.2.76 (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Flag to disable/enable the normal fast scheduling mode for the uplink TBFs in extended mode 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled. No No
912 / 1278
6.2.77 (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Flag to enable/disable the full fast scheduling mode for uplink TBFs in EUTM. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
- The full fast USF scheduling can be enabled /disabled independently on the normal fast USF scheduling (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED parameter) - The parameter is relevant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled No No
913 / 1278
6.2.78 (EN_FULL_IR_DL) - (EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_FULL_IR_DL EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the downlink TBF in the cell. 0: Disable the "full" IR, so : Incremental Redundancy with resegmentation allowed in DL, 1: Enable the "full" IR, so, Incremental Redundancy without resegmentation in DL To allow the best throughput in DL, it is strongly recommended to set this parameter to 0 i.e. to not forbid the resegmentation. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
914 / 1278
6.2.79 (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33) (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Enables the support of (E)GPRS multislot class 30-33. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Support of DTM (E)GPRS multislot classes 31 to 33 is possible only if EN_DTM = 1 and EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 = 1. Support of configurations requiring EDA is possible only if EN_EDA = 1 (and ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 1 in case of DTM). No No
915 / 1278
6.2.80 (EN_NACC) - (EN_NACC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_NACC EN_NACC
Enables the Network Assisted Cell Change feature. 0: disabled; 1:enabled Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_NACC = 0 Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
916 / 1278
6.2.81 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR) - (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered from the serving cell. 0: Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered 1: Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS traffic (for instance a macro cell). No No
917 / 1278
6.2.82 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)) (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n) EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered from the serving cell. 0: Disable Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered 1: Enable Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Flag MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS traffic (for instance a macro cell). No No
918 / 1278
6.2.83 (EN_PFC_FEATURE) - (EN_PFC_FEATURE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_PFC_FEATURE EN_PFC_FEATURE
Enables/disables the support of the PFC negotiation feature. 1 => PFC feature is supported, 0 => PFC feature is not supported Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS. No No
919 / 1278
6.2.84 (EN_PSI_STATUS) - (EN_PSI_STATUS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PSI_STATUS EN_PSI_STATUS
Enables the Packet SI Status feature in cells w/o PBCCH or the Packet PSI Status feature in cells with a PBCCH. 0: disabled; 1:enabled Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_PSI_STATUS = 0 Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
920 / 1278
6.2.85 (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE) - (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Flag to enable/disable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb 0: disabled, 1: enabled This parameter must be enabled if RA capability update is supported by SGSN and if it exists, at least, one cell where EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled. The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled. If EN_STREAMING is set to 1 then EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS.
Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
921 / 1278
6.2.86 (EN_RIM_NACC) - (EN_RIM_NACC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RIM_NACC EN_RIM_NACC
Flag to disable/enable the Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC features (inter-RAT = inter-3G or inter-LTE). It covers both controlling and serving aspects : for controlling MFS, this is the ability to request and receive System Information messages from the Gb interface and to broadcast them to MS through the PACCH. For serving MFS, this is the ability to provide System Information messages when requested by another BSS/RNC. 0: Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are disabled 1: Inter-BSS NACC only is enabled 2 Inter-3G NACC only is enabled 3 Inter-BSS and Inter-3G NACC are enabled 4 Inter-LTE NACC only is enabled 5 Inter-BSS and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled 6 Inter-3G and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled 7 Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are enabled Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- For a BSS working as a controlling BSS, the Inter-BSS NACC feature can be effective for a serving cell, if EN_NACC feature is enabled in that cell. For a BSS working as a serving BSS, there is no interaction with the EN_NACC feature. - Parameter change: When enabling (setting from 0 to <>0), a reset of all the BVC SIG is automatically performed (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS traffic in the BSS). In case of disabling (setting from <>0 to 0), the reset is automatically done only on the NSEs of the BSS, connected to a SGSN supporting the RIM feature (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS traffic on these SGSN(s)). In any other case of modification, there is no impact on the PS traffic; on going TBFs are not disrupted.
922 / 1278
No No
923 / 1278
6.2.87 (EN_STREAMING) - (EN_STREAMING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_STREAMING EN_STREAMING
Enables/disables the support of the STREAMING flows. 1 => the cell supports the streaming flows in addition to the non real time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful 0 => the cell supports the non real time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful - If EN_STREAMING = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 0 - When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_STREAMING = 0 1) If this parameter is set to 1 then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS. 2) the parameter EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK must also set to "TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio interface. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
No No
924 / 1278
6.2.88 (Excess Burst Size) - (EBS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Excess Burst Size EBS
Excess Burst Size. CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0 CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC EBS=FR_CAPACITY(expressed in kbit/s) / 8, if CIR=0 Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbyte Minimum 0 Maximum 248 Default None
No No
925 / 1278
6.2.89 (GAMMA_TNx) - (GAMMA_TNx)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GAMMA_TNx GAMMA_TNx
Binary representation of the "gamma ch" for MS output power control. Coded on 5 bits, step size=2dB, with 00000 == 0 dB, 00001 == 2 dB, ... 11111 == 62 dB. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
In the context of a concentric cell, the parameter applies to the outer zone. No No
926 / 1278
6.2.90 (Gb_Transport_Mode) - (Gb_Transport_Mode)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Gb_Transport_Mode Gb_Transport_Mode
Mode of the transport for Gb interface: FR or IP. 0: FR mode 1: IP mode - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP. - If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode of the NSE. When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode defined in the NSE instance). - Parameter change: before to set to transport mode to FR, the operator has to delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE per GPU, ie no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS). Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously all the GP/GPUs connected to this BSS.
No No
927 / 1278
6.2.91 (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE) - (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Mode of the transport for Gb interface (per NSE): FR or IP. 0: FR mode 1: IP mode Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
- When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode of the NSE. When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode defined in the NSE instance). - Parameter change: Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously the associated GP/GPU.
No No
928 / 1278
6.2.92 (GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter) (GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage
Reduction factor of the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when the Ater usage is "high". step size = 0.01 A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same moment in the GPU). Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 1 Default 0.75
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - The GCH reduction factor applies to the new PDCHs which are used when the Ater usage is "high" (see the Ater_Usage_Threshold parameter). This parameter can be reduced in order to avoid Ater shortage situations. No No
929 / 1278
6.2.93 (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Additional hysteresis which applies in Ready state for cells in same RA. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001= 2 dB, 111=14 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 4
No No
930 / 1278
6.2.94 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the system. Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31 The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band: P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
931 / 1278
6.2.95 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the system. Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31 The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band: P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
932 / 1278
6.2.96 (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE) (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Default value of the (E)GPRS multislot class assumed at TBF establishment when the actual MS (E)GPRS multislot class is unknown. The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBF allocation computation process when the MS class is not known on UL TBF establishment. Only the following GPRS multislot class defined in 3GPP TS 05.02 annex B are allowed: 1: GPRS multislot class 1 (1+1 MS); 2: GPRS multislot class 2 (2+1 MS); 4: GPRS multislot class 4 (3+1 MS); 8: GPRS multislot class 8 (4+1 MS); 30: GPRS multislot class 30 (5+1 MS). The recommendations to set this parameter are the following: 1) In case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a great proportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishment requests), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE shall be set to 1 (optimization of the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU). 2) In case the PS traffic is mainly data (high proportion of UL TBF establishment requests for data traffic), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE should be set to the most common multislot class which can be found among the mobile stations within the BSS (in order to limit the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU, triggered with the establishment of the concurrent DL TBF). In case of multislot class 30, this additionally requires that the multislot class 30-33 feature is widely activated in the BSS. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 8
Coding rules
External Comment
The entered value is assumed by default at uplink TBF establishment when the actual MS multislot class is unknown (e.g. RACH one phase access on CCCH) . Otherwise, the multislot class received in the request for uplink TBF establishment is taken into account.
933 / 1278
No No
934 / 1278
6.2.97 (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME) - (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_PENALTY_TIME GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
Time during which GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in neighbour cells. step size = 10 sec, coded on 5 bits (00000 = 10 sec, 11111 = 320 sec) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 320 Default 10
No No
935 / 1278
6.2.98 (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET) (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
Permanent offset for GPRS cell reselection in neighbour cells. coded on 5 bits (00000 = -52 dB, 11111 = 48 dB) 00000= -52; 00001= -48; 00010= -44; 00011= -40; 00100= -36; 00101= -32; 00110= -28; 00111= -24; 01000= -20; 01001= -16; 01010= -12; 01011= -10; 01100= - 8; 01101= - 6; 01110= - 4; 01111= - 2; 10000= 0; 10001= 2; 10010= 4; 10011= 6; 10100= 8; 10101=10; 10110= 12; 10111= 16; 11000= 20; 11001= 24; 11010= 28; 11011= 32; 11100= 36; 11101= 40; 11110= 44; 11111= 48 Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum -52 Maximum 48 Default 0
No No
936 / 1278
6.2.99 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system. step size = 1 dBm, coded on 6 bits (000000 = -110 dBm, 111111 = -47 dBm) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
937 / 1278
6.2.100 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system in neighbour cells. coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
938 / 1278
6.2.101 (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET) (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Negative offset used for MS cell reselection process in neighbour cells. Possible values : 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinity respectively binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111 Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
Coding rules
No No
939 / 1278
6.2.102 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules HCS_THR GPRS_HCS_THR
HCS signal strength. Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48 dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -48 Default -84
No No
940 / 1278
6.2.103 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules HCS_THR GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
HCS signal strength. Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48 dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -48 Default -84
No No
941 / 1278
6.2.104 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to high Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
942 / 1278
6.2.105 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to high Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
943 / 1278

No No
944 / 1278

No No
945 / 1278
6.2.108 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Load threshold used to determine a certain margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic between two sending of the BSCGP RR Allocation Indication messages. The threshold is expressed in percentage of the radio timeslots available in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 90
External Comment
The margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic can be computed as follows: (100 - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)/100*NB_TS where NB_TS is the number of radio timeslots available in the cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
946 / 1278
6.2.109 (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Maximum duration of UL TBF inactivity before MS is polled in EUTM mode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled). step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 1000 Default 300
External Comment
Change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going UL TBFs No No
947 / 1278
6.2.110 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when establishing GCHs for a GPRS TBF associated to a "short data" MS transfer. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 2
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new TBF established after modification. No No
948 / 1278
6.2.111 (LAC) - (LAC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC (MFS)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Equal to LAC (BSC) A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
949 / 1278
6.2.112 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC(n) (MFS)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time. Equal to LAC(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Reference MFS adj Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
950 / 1278
6.2.113 (Level 1 down) - (PVC_Level1_down)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Level 1 down PVC_Level1_down
This parameter gives the low level of threshold for congestion. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 40
No No
951 / 1278
6.2.114 (Level 1 Factor) - (PVC_Level1_Factor)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Level 1 Factor PVC_Level1_Factor
This parameter is used to calculate the amount of data used for buffering. step size = 0.01 amount of memory needed : PVC_Level1_factor * 10 * (CBS+EBS) for a PVC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit None Minimum 0.05 Maximum 12.75 Default 1
No No
952 / 1278
6.2.115 (Level 1 up) - (PVC_Level1_up)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Level 1 up PVC_Level1_up
This parameter gives the high level of threshold for congestion. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
No No
953 / 1278
6.2.116 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Number of load samples (calculated every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds) used to compute the maximum number of slave PDCHs that the BSC can allocate to the MFS. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 30 Default 3
No No
954 / 1278
6.2.117 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to low Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
955 / 1278
6.2.118 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to low Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
956 / 1278

No No
957 / 1278

No No
958 / 1278
6.2.121 (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Indicative value of the maximum number of DownLink (E)GPRS TBFs per Slave PDCH. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 8
External Comment
When allocating a DL GPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave PDCH. When allocating a DL EGPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave PDCH (regardless of the current number of DL GPRS TBFs). No No
959 / 1278
6.2.122 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS) - (MAX_EGPRS_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for EGPRS traffic in the cell. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: MCS-1; MCS-2; MCS-3; MCS-4; MCS-5; MCS-6; MCS-7; MCS-8; MCS-9;
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_DL_INIT_MCS MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_UL_INIT_MCS When cell_type = "extended outer", then MAX_EGPRS_MCS <= MCS-4 R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be higher than 59,2kbps). R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. It is advised to set MAX_EGPRS_MCS to a value different from MCS-2 to cope with MEGCH control message granularity in an optimal way. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 9
Recommended rules
External Comment
Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
960 / 1278
No No
961 / 1278
6.2.123 (MAX_GPRS_CS) - (MAX_GPRS_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MAX_GPRS_CS MAX_GPRS_CS
Maximum coding scheme used for GPRS traffic in the cell. 1 : CS-2; 2 : CS-3; 3 : CS-4 MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_DL_INIT_CS MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_UL_INIT_CS If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2. The aim of this last rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is not allowed)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher than 12kbps) R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 4 Default 2
External Comment
- This parameter can be set to CS-3 or CS-4 only if the related feature has been bought and controlled per quantity. - Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing No No
962 / 1278
6.2.124 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Maximum coding scheme used for the DL GPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 1: 2: 3: 4: In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1 CS-1 coded as 0 CS-2 coded as 1 CS-3 coded as 2 CS-4 coded as 3
Coding rules
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Setting this parameter to CS-2 might introduce some problems (because a CS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be sent in the M-EGCH link in DL). - If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead. - Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing. No No
963 / 1278
6.2.125 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Maximum coding scheme used for the UL GPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 1: 2: 3: 4: In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2 CS-1 coded as 0 CS-2 coded as 1 CS-3 coded as 2 CS-4 coded as 3
Coding rules
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead. - Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing. No No
964 / 1278
6.2.126 (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE) - (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_PAGING_QUEUE MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Maximum number of CS+PS paging messages stored in GPU. Paging Rate = 100 paging/s AND Queueing Time = 5s Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 50 Maximum 1000 Default 500
No No
965 / 1278
6.2.127 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MFS))

Management of Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell Parameter)
This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visible to the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH. When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can accept MFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be some inconsistencies, but these might not have any impact: When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set to their default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may be inconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installs GPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through this operation, the flag Enable_GPRS is recomputed for the cells concerned by the PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line for the cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with Enable_GPRS set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all (no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator). Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up the EN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of these cells currently stored in the OMC-R: 1. Copy the SC into the PRC 2. Activate this PRC Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service for GPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is already started for GPRS). Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH MAX_PDCH (MFS)
Creation of a BSC
DLS Restore When the Flag is Not In Lline With Max_PDCH
Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS in the cell.
Coding rules
966 / 1278
Mandatory rules
Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH (MX BSC) Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD; If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ; If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE; If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE; If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) < Total number of TCHs of the cell" If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2. The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is not allowed) MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can be allocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means that MAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE. When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number. The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH: i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined" ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined" iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX iv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2
Recommended rules
In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force the MS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cell reselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cell reselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0 and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to NC0 in the micro cell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended: NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1, MIN_PDCH = 1. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
967 / 1278
External Comment
127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0
No No
968 / 1278
6.2.128 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)
Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS when the CS traffic is high. Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC) - MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD - MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH - If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
969 / 1278
6.2.129 (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF) - (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a single (E)GPRS connection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 5
No No
970 / 1278
6.2.130 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS Max_retrans (MFS)
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the RACH, broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment. Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01, 10 and 11 Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
External Comment
971 / 1278
6.2.131 (MAX_RETRANS_1) - (MAX_RETRANS_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS_1 MAX_RETRANS_1
Maximum number of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the PRACH with priority level 1. Possible values are : 1, 2, 4, 7 respectively binary coded : 00, 01, 10, 11 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
No No
972 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
973 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
974 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
975 / 1278
6.2.135 (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Indicative value of maximum number of UpLink (E)GPRS TBFs per slave PDCH. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 6 Default 5
External Comment
When allocating an UL GPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave PDCH. When allocating an UL EGPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave PDCH (regardless of the current number of UL GPRS TBFs). No No
976 / 1278
6.2.136 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_PDCH MIN_PDCH (MFS)
Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are always allocated to the MFS. - Shall be equal to MIN_PDCH (MX BSC) -MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH; -MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; -MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled. -When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than the maximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, in order to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
Recommended rules
127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
977 / 1278
6.2.137 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Country Code (MCC) MCC (MFS)
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled: - MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS). - The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
External Comment
The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
978 / 1278
6.2.138 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Network Code (MNC) MNC (MFS)
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled: - MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS). - The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs. - The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
External Comment
The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC. MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111) MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
979 / 1278
6.2.139 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
980 / 1278
6.2.140 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm. GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm. DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
External Comment
981 / 1278
6.2.141 (N_AVG_I (BSC)) - (N_AVG_I (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_AVG_I (BSC) N_AVG_I (BSC)
N_AVG_I (BSC) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the SI13. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power control, but also reported to the network and used for performing downlink link adaptation. coded on 4 bits Equal to N_AVG_I (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
982 / 1278
6.2.142 (N_AVG_I (MFS)) - (N_AVG_I (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_AVG_I (MFS) N_AVG_I (MFS)
N_AVG_I (MFS) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the PSI 13 and PSI1. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power control, but also reported to the network and used for performing downlink link adaptation. coded on 4 bits Equal to N_AVG_I (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
983 / 1278
6.2.143 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS) (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Number of bytes below which an MS transfer is considered to be "short data". step size = 1 byte N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <= N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit byte Minimum 20 Maximum 10000 Default 150
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - An MS transfer is considered to be "short data" as long as less than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in both directions (since the TBF establishment(s)). Else, if more than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in at least one direction, the MS transfer is considered to be "long data". Note: in DL, the bytes of the DL LLC PDUs currently queued for the MS (but not yet sent to the MS) are also counted. Decreasing (respectively increasing) the value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS will tend: - to make the Ater resource optimization worse (respectively better) when the Ater usage of the GPU is above Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data, - to reduce (respectively make higher) the PS throughput degradations at the beginning of MS traffics when the Ater usage of the GPU is above Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data, - to make the MFS and BSC CPU loads higher (respectively lower). - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. Change applied immediately on current TBF and on new TBF, established after modification.
No No
984 / 1278
6.2.144 (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT) - (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT
Maximum number of consecutive polling requests that can be sent to a MS in EUTM state (when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled)) without receiving a polling response in a PCA. step size = 1 The value of the parameter should be set to a value high enough to avoid any spurious abnormal UL TBF releases. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 20 Default 10
External Comment
A change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going UL TBFs. No No
985 / 1278
6.2.145 (N_RIM_RETRIES) - (N_RIM_RETRIES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_RIM_RETRIES N_RIM_RETRIES
Number of times a RAN procedure is retried (after first attempt) before giving up (in case of no answer is received) Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 2
No No
986 / 1278
6.2.146 (N3101_LIMIT) - (N3101_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N3101_LIMIT N3101_LIMIT
In an UL TBF tranfer procedure, maximum of consecutive times (before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network receives no valid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS on its allocated PDCH. To note that the counter N3101 can be incremented more than one time per block period. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 64 Default 64
No No
987 / 1278
6.2.147 (N3103_LIMIT) - (N3103_LIMIT)

In an UL TBF releasing procedure, maximum of consecutive times (before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network does not receive a Packet Control Acknowledgement from the MS in response of its Packet UL ACK/NACK which specifies the end of the TBF. N3103_Limit: maximum number of retransmissions to release an UL TBF Max_Retrans_DL: maximum number of retransmissions to establish a DL TBF In case of simultaneous UL TBF Release and DL TBF establishment with loss of the Packet Control Ack which acknowledges the final Packet UL Ack/Nack, the UL TBF has to be released, at least before the last attempt to establish the DL TBF, in order to avoid the emission of a Radio Status. Consequently the following rule has to be followed: (N3103_Limit + 1) x (RTD + 60) < Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) N3103_Limit + 1: total number of attempts to send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack RTD: Round Trip Delay 60 (msec): for the Packet UL Ack/Nack acknowledgement: RRBP + 3 is used Max_Retrans_DL: total number of attempts minus one to send the Packet DL Assignment 60 (msec): for the Packet DL Assignment acknowledgement: RRBP + 3 is used N3103_Limit < (Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) / (RTD + 60)) - 1 N3103_Limit < [Max_Retrans_DL] - 1 Example: With Max_Retrans_DL = 3: N3103_Limit < 2 that is N3103_Limit = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 1
External Comment
988 / 1278
No No
989 / 1278
6.2.148 (N3105_LIMIT) - (N3105_LIMIT)

For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 20
External Comment
If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
990 / 1278
6.2.149 (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) - (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 24
External Comment
If N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period_Satellite, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
991 / 1278
6.2.150 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_TS_MPDCH NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC)
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary master PDCHs defined in the cell. 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled. 2) if the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to 2 (NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH: i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined" ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined" iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX. 4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
992 / 1278
External Comment
- Only the value 0 is supported - The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following criteria: * higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link; * limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is established. Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is: * for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended; * for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not recommended. No No
993 / 1278
6.2.151 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_TS_MPDCH NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS)
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary master PDCHs defined in the cell. 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled. 2) if the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to 2 (NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0. 3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH: i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined" ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined" iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX. 4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
994 / 1278
External Comment
- Only the value 0 is supported - The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following criteria: * higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link; * limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is established. Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is: * for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended; * for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not recommended. No No
995 / 1278
6.2.152 (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT2 can be triggered due to the detection of a better neighbour cell. 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm (Always)" (step size = 1 dB) In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT2 (i.e. set NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR to -110 dBm (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Coding rules
External Comment
1) The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselections Cause PT2. 2) The specific value of "-47 dBm (Always)" systematically allows the triggering of NC cell reselections Cause PT2 No No
996 / 1278
6.2.153 (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXLEV_THR NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT1 is triggered due to a too bad RXLEV in the downlink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm" (step size = 1 dB) In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to activate NC cell reselection Cause PT1 (i.e. set NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
Coding rules
External Comment
The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT1. No No
997 / 1278
6.2.154 (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT3 is triggered due to a too bad RXQUAL in downlink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed: "0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)". In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT3 (i.e. set NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 7
Coding rules
External Comment
The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT3. No No
998 / 1278
6.2.155 (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET) - (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
NC ping-pong offset which is applied to the C2 or C32 criterion to disfavour the neighbour cells during T_NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET. step size = 1 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 5
No No
999 / 1278
6.2.156 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T) - (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while in packet transfer mode. coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92 sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0: 30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) . Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.48 Maximum 61.44 Default 0.96
Coding rules
No No
1000 / 1278
6.2.157 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)) (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n) NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while in packet transfer mode. coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92 sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0: 30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) . Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 0.48 Maximum 61.44 Default 0.96
Coding rules
No No
1001 / 1278
6.2.158 (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n)
NC cell reselection offset used for triggering power budget causes. 0: -127 dB (Always), 1: -126 dB, ..., 254: 127 dB, 255: 128 dB (Never) (step size = 1 dB) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 128 Default 128
External Comment
1) The specific value of "128 dB (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n. 2) The specific value of "-127 dB" (Always)" systematically triggers the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n. No No
1002 / 1278
6.2.159 (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR) (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Forgetting factor of the filter used to average the NC measurements reported in the Packet Measurement Report messages. step size = 0.001 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.13
This parameter applies to the serving cell and the neighbour cells. No No
1003 / 1278
6.2.160 (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD) - (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Period after which a weight of 0.9 s is applied to the current UL or DL RXQUAL samples in the averaging filter. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 10000 Default 4000
This parameter applies to the serving cell. No No
1004 / 1278
6.2.161 (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT4 is triggered due to a too bad RXQUAL in uplink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed: "0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)" In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT4 (i.e. set NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 7
Coding rules
External Comment
The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT4. No No
1005 / 1278
6.2.162 (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE) - (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
NC2 deactivation mode. This parameter defines whether or not the Packet Measurement Order message with a Reset Command is sent at the end of a packet transfer. 0: "NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer". A Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode at the end of the packet transfer. 1: "NC2 deactivation at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer". No Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode. In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered systematically (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Disable), the presence of the PBCCH is not mandatory. However, the following recommendations apply, depending on the presence of the PBCCH: - If PBCCH is present, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE can be set to any value (at the end of the packet transfer mode or at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer) if the setting of the C32 parameters ensures that GPRS mobile stations do not camp in cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered. - If PBCCH is not present or PBCCH is present but C32 parameters are not correctly set, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE should be set to "at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer" to prevent the GPRS mobile stations from reselecting a cell where outgoing GPRS redirections are triggered systematically (at least while the MS is in packet idle mode and the GMM Ready timer is running).
Coding rules
No No
1006 / 1278
6.2.163 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell reselections. 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections and no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. (Not supported) 2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator. - When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1007 / 1278
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message). If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message will not be sent). No No
1008 / 1278
6.2.164 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n)
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell reselections. 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. (Not supported) 2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. 4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator. - When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1009 / 1278
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message). This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION parameter. No No
1010 / 1278
6.2.165 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Network_mode_of_operation network_operation_mode (BSC)
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging. 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 == Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III. If the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to NMO II then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 Equal to network_operation_mode (MFS).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS, either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled" (network_operation_mode <> NMO I). Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
External Comment
Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of (E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS. NMO I requires a Gs interface. No No
1011 / 1278
6.2.166 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Network_mode_of_operation network_operation_mode (MFS)
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging. 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 == Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III If the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to NMO II then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0. Equal to network_operation_mode (BSC).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS, either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled" (network_operation_mode <> NMO I). Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
External Comment
Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of (E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS. NMO I requires a Gs interface. No No
1012 / 1278
6.2.167 (Normal Information Rate) - (NIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Normal Information Rate NIR
Normal Information Rate. CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC NIR=0 when direct access is used Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 1984 Default 0
No No
1013 / 1278
6.2.168 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to normal Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
1014 / 1278
6.2.169 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to normal Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
1015 / 1278

No No
1016 / 1278

No No
1017 / 1278
6.2.172 (NS Priority) - (NS_Priority)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NS Priority NS_Priority
Priority of the NSVC, is used by the load sharing (used for Gb over Frame Relay interface). 1: lowest priority, 255:highest priority Site (CAE) Number MFS NSVC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
No No
1018 / 1278
6.2.173 (NSEI) - (NSEI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NSE Identifier. The NSEI shall be unique per MFS. Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent No No Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None NSEI NSEI
1019 / 1278
6.2.174 (NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT
This parameter defines the maximum number of consecutive Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or EGPRS Packet Downlink ACK/NACK messages reporting the failure of progress of the RLC window during the active phase of a downlink TBF, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 256 Default 32
No No
1020 / 1278
6.2.175 (NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT
NstagnatingWindow limit above which a mono-slot uplink TBF alone on its PDCH shall be released: the counter is incremented each time a Packet UL Ack/Nack fails in making the RLC window progress. For a multi-slot TBF or a TBF which shares its PDCH, the limit is proportional to the allocated bandwidth at the TBF establishment. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 256 Default 10
No No
1021 / 1278
6.2.176 (NSVC Identifier) - (NSVCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NSVC Identifier NSVCI
NSVC identifier (used for Gb over Frame Relay interface). Site (CAE) Number MFS NSVC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None
No No
1022 / 1278
6.2.177 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_DEC PAN_DEC (BSC)
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_DEC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1023 / 1278
6.2.178 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_DEC PAN_DEC (MFS)
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_DEC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1024 / 1278
6.2.179 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_INC PAN_INC (BSC)
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is received by MS. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_INC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1025 / 1278
6.2.180 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_INC PAN_INC (MFS)
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is received by MS. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_INC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1026 / 1278
6.2.181 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_MAX PAN_MAX (BSC)
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS when N3102 <= 0. Possible values : 4, 8, 12...., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001, ..., 111 Equal to PAN_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 32 Default 32
Coding rules
No No
1027 / 1278
6.2.182 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_MAX PAN_MAX (MFS)
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS when N3102 <= 0. Possible values : 4, 8, 12,.., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,.. , 111 Equal to PAN_MAX (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 32 Default 32
Coding rules
No No
1028 / 1278
6.2.183 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PC_MEAS_CHAN PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC)
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink power control. 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS). PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
No No
1029 / 1278
6.2.184 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PC_MEAS_CHAN PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS)
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink power control. 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH, 1 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on PDCH Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC). PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
No No
1030 / 1278
6.2.185 (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 0.5
No No
1031 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1
No No
1032 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1.5
No No
1033 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2
No No
1034 / 1278

Upper limit of the 5th band, lower limit of the 6th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2.5
No No
1035 / 1278

No No
1036 / 1278

Upper limit of the 7th band, lower limit of the 8th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_7 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 3.5
No No
1037 / 1278

No No
1038 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 4.5
No No
1039 / 1278
6.2.194 (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for DL TBF duration distribution. step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 0.5
No No
1040 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 1
No No
1041 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 2
No No
1042 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 3
No No
1043 / 1278

No No
1044 / 1278

No No
1045 / 1278

No No
1046 / 1278

No No
1047 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 100
No No
1048 / 1278
6.2.203 (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 500
No No
1049 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 1000
No No
1050 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 2000
No No
1051 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 3000
No No
1052 / 1278

No No
1053 / 1278

No No
1054 / 1278

No No
1055 / 1278

No No
1056 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 100000
No No
1057 / 1278
6.2.212 (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 0.5
No No
1058 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1
No No
1059 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1.5
No No
1060 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2
No No
1061 / 1278

Upper limit of the 5th band, lower limit of the 6th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2.5
No No
1062 / 1278

No No
1063 / 1278

Upper limit of the 7th band, lower limit of the 8th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_7 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 3.5
No No
1064 / 1278

No No
1065 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 4.5
No No
1066 / 1278
6.2.221 (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for UL TBF duration distribution. step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 0.5
No No
1067 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 1
No No
1068 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 2
No No
1069 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 3
No No
1070 / 1278

No No
1071 / 1278

No No
1072 / 1278

No No
1073 / 1278

No No
1074 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 100
No No
1075 / 1278
6.2.230 (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 500
No No
1076 / 1278

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 1000
No No
1077 / 1278

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 2000
No No
1078 / 1278

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 3000
No No
1079 / 1278

No No
1080 / 1278

No No
1081 / 1278

No No
1082 / 1278

No No
1083 / 1278

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 100000
No No
1084 / 1278
6.2.239 (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1) - (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1 PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
This parameter indicates the values of the access persistence level for radio priority 1. Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4 bits 0 0 0 0 : persistence level 0, 0 0 0 1: persistence level 1, 0 0 1 0:persistence level 2, 0 0 1 1: persistence level 3, 0 1.0.0 : persistence level 4 . . . . 1 1 1 0 : persistence level 14, 1 1 1 1: persistence level 16 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16 Default 0
Coding rules
No No
1085 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
1086 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
1087 / 1278

Coding rules
No No
1088 / 1278
6.2.243 (PFC_T6) - (PFC_T6)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PFC_T6 PFC_T6
Timer guarding the Download-BSS-PFC procedure step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.5
No No
1089 / 1278
6.2.244 (PFC_T8) - (PFC_T8)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PFC_T8 PFC_T8
Timer guarding the Modify-BSS-PFC procedure step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.5
No No
1090 / 1278
6.2.245 (PRACH_BUSY_THRES) - (PRACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules PRACH_BUSY_THRES PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Received level above which a PRACH block is deemed busy. This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows: 0: -110 dBm 1: -106 dBm 2: -102 dBm 3: -98 dBm 4: -94 dBm 5: -90 dBm 6: -86 dBm 7: -82 dBm 8: -78 dBm 9: -74 dBm 10: -70 dBm 11: -66 dBm 12: -62 dBm 13: -58 dBm 14: -54 dBm 15: -50 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -50 Default -106
External Comment
Parameter used in dynamic allocation of secondary MasterPDCH algorithm. No No
1091 / 1278
6.2.246 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PRIORITY_CLASS GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS
HCS priority of the cell, used in NC0. Coded on 3 bits. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1092 / 1278
6.2.247 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PRIORITY_CLASS GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
HCS priority of the adjacent cell, used in NC0. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
No No
1093 / 1278
6.2.248 (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX) - (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Indicates whether or not the PS requests shall be preferentially served with PDCH(s) of the BCCH TRX 0: No preference. The TRX ranking algorithm handles the BCCH TRX as a non-BCCH TRX. 1: PS requests preferentially served on BCCH TRX. The TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the highest preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX). 2 : PS requests served on BCCH TRX with lowest priority. The TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the lowest preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).
Coding rules
If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping / radio-hopping cell, Alcatel recommend to set this parameter to 0 in order to reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output power (see external comment). If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, setting this parameter to 0 does not reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output power since PS capable TRXs will hop on the BCCH carrier. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
1094 / 1278
External Comment
When set to 1 or 2, this parameter is only relevant if the BCCH TRX supports PS traffic (i.e. if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on the BCCH TRX). If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping / radio-hopping cell, if the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic and if the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined on timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX). If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GMSK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if timeslot number 7 is not part of the PDCH groups). No No
1095 / 1278
6.2.249 (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN) - (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Additional capacity (in terms of radio bandwidth and in terms of transmission resources) which is reserved for a streaming TBF (RT PFC) to correctly fulfil its AGBR contract and to possibly convey other multiplexed NRT PFC(s) of the same TBF. The part of this margin that is not used by the streaming TBF may be used by other TBF(s). step size = 1% Setting QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN to 0% is not recommended (the GBR of some RT PFCs may turn out to be impossible to guarantee in this case). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 20
External Comment
In case of IP transport in the BSS, UDP/IP headers are taken into account in the bandwidth computation No No
1096 / 1278
6.2.250 (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Average bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be higher than 59,2kbps). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 59200 Default 30000
External Comment
This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted, per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average measured bit rate in the cell. The default value corresponds to MCS-6. The max value corresponds to MCS-9. No No
1097 / 1278
6.2.251 (R_AVERAGE_GPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Average bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher than 12kbps). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 12000
External Comment
This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted, per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average measured bit rate in the cell. The default value corresponds to CS-2. The max value corresponds to CS-4. No No
1098 / 1278
6.2.252 (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) - (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
This parameter indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the additional hysteresis which applies when selecting a cell in a new Routing Area. step size = 2 dB, Coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001=2 dB, ...111=14 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 8
No No
1099 / 1278
6.2.253 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS)
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST filtering. 64: no filtering Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC) Disable the filtering for extended cells. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 64
External Comment
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are discarded. No No
1100 / 1278
6.2.254 (RMIN_EGPRS) - (RMIN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMIN_EGPRS RMIN_EGPRS
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less %, depending on tolerable risk) RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_EGPRS <= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS, TBF_DL_INIT_MCS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP. R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 59200 Default 20800
External Comment
This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming PFC for Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning. The default value corresponds to a bitrate between MCS-4 and MCS-5. The max value corresponds to MCS-9. No No
1101 / 1278
6.2.255 (RMIN_GPRS) - (RMIN_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMIN_GPRS RMIN_GPRS
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less, depending on tolerable risk) RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_GPRS <= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_CS, TBF_DL_INIT_CS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP. R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 8000
External Comment
This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming PFC for Non Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning. The default value corresponds to CS-1. The max value corresponds to CS-4. No No
1102 / 1278
6.2.256 (Round trip delay MFS-MS) - (round_trip_delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Round trip delay MFS-MS round_trip_delay
Round trip delay between the MFS and a MS, in TDM and IP mode. step size=10 ms - T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec - If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BT, then EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 80 Maximum 940 Default 160
External Comment
The round-trip delay is used by the RRM layers. The OMC-R and the MFS also use this parameter to determine whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links as follows: - If round_trip_delay < 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider that GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links, - If round_trip_delay >= 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider that GPRS traffic is carried through one satellite link: either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in case Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM); or through a satellite link between BTS and MFS in case Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP). When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links in the serving cell, it is recommended to set the round_trip_delay parameter to [Delay due to satellite (540 ms) + Delay due to MFS-MS link (160 ms)] = 700 ms.
No No
1103 / 1278
6.2.257 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE (BSC)
Routing Area Code for GPRS. The initial special value -1 means that the RA code has still not been set by the operator. - Equal to RA_CODE (MFS) - A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1104 / 1278
6.2.258 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE (MFS)
Routing Area Code. 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60) other values: external or unknown cell - Equal to RA_CODE (BSC) - A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1105 / 1278
6.2.259 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE(n)
Routing Area Code of neighbour cells. 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60); other values: external or unknown cell. The special value of "-1" means that the RA code has still not been valued by the network provider or that the MFS shall set the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field to 0. If i) the target and serving cells belong to different PLMNs and ii) the RAC and LAC of the target cell are equal to the RAC and LAC of the serving cell, and iii) there is a PBCCH established in the serving cell, and iv) a cell reselection adjacency link is defined between the serving cell and the target cell, then it is recommended to set the RA_CODE to -1. Otherwise, the MFS considers that the serving cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area when setting the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field in the 04.60 PACKET SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3/3bis messages. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
External Comment
The special value of -1 means that the RA code has still not been valued by the operator or that the routing area of the serving cell is different from the routing area of the target cell. No No
1106 / 1278
6.2.260 (Routing Area Colour for GPRS) - (RA_COLOUR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Colour for GPRS RA_COLOUR
Routing Area Colour for GPRS. Coded over 3 bits. the initial special value -1 means that the RA codecolour has not yet been valued by the network provider. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
External Comment
Default value depends on the configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1107 / 1278
6.2.261 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
1108 / 1278
6.2.262 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
No No
1109 / 1278
6.2.263 (S) - (S)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition S S
Number of slots between 2 successive PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are : 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217 respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010,... ,1001 When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 900 ms. When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 1400 ms. The number of slots belonging to the MSs PRACH between 2 successive Packet Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1) with T = Tx_INT. The time in seconds between two Packet Channel Request messages is determined as a function of S, TX_INT and of the BS_PRACH_BLKS parameter. BS_PRACH_BLKS defines the number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each PCCCH.
Coding rules
No No
1110 / 1278
6.2.264 (SGSNR) - (SGSNR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SGSNR SGSNR
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement SGSN software. 0 = SGSN is release 98 or older; 1 = SGSN is release 99 onwards EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS. No No
1111 / 1278
6.2.265 (SMS_PRIORITY) - (SMS_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMS_PRIORITY SMS_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined "SMS" PFC. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
1112 / 1278
6.2.266 (T stop frame relay emission) - (T_STOP_FR_EMISSION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T stop frame relay emission T_STOP_FR_EMISSION
Timer used to trigger restart of emission on a PVC (Frame Relay). step size = 1 ms Not changeable after MFS system initialization. Site (CAE) Timer MFS PVC Unit ms Minimum 10 Maximum 5000 Default 100
No No
1113 / 1278
6.2.267 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_T T_AVG_T (BSC)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_T (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 12
No No
1114 / 1278
6.2.268 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_T T_AVG_T (MFS)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_T (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 12
No No
1115 / 1278
6.2.269 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_W T_AVG_W (BSC)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_W (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 20
No No
1116 / 1278
6.2.270 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_W T_AVG_W (MFS)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_W (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 20
No No
1117 / 1278
6.2.271 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN) - (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
This timer defines the duration of the delay introduced by the BSS to send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack message when releasing an UL TBF. step size : 100 ms ; 0 = 0 msec, 1 = 100 msec, 2 = 200 msec, etc Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 2000 Default 400
External Comment
- The feature "delayed emission of the final Packet UL Ack/Nack" can be inhibited by setting the value 0 to the parameter T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN. When the feature is enabled, the timer duration should be long enough to let the server send its response to the uplink PDUs received from the MS, while remaining short enough in order not to jeopardise the sending of further uplink PDUs by the MS. - If GPRS traffic between one BTS and the MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, and if T_delayed_Final_PUAN < 540ms then the MS will wait for a delay equal to Max (540ms, T_delayed_Final_PUAN). This is due to the delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side, PTU at BTS side). Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link. No No
1118 / 1278
6.2.272 (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Time period to request for a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with measurements. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 60 Maximum 3000 Default 400
No No
1119 / 1278
6.2.273 (T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL) - (T_flow_ctrl_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL T_flow_ctrl_cell
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message to SGSN. step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 0
No No
1120 / 1278
6.2.274 (T_FLOW_CTRL_MS) - (T_flow_ctrl_ms)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_FLOW_CTRL_MS T_flow_ctrl_ms
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-MS message towards the SGSN for GPRS and EGPRS Mobile Stations. step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Default 10
External Comment
1) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is set to "0", then the MS flow control mechanism is inhibited; 2) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS has a non-null value, then "C< T_flow_ctrl_ms < Th". The parameters C and Th are defined in the 3GPP TS 08.18. No No
1121 / 1278
6.2.275 (T_GCH_CORR) - (Tcorr)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_GCH_CORR Tcorr
Timer to supervise clock drift correction loop for 16k channel. step size=100ms Tcorr > Trelease+240ms and Tcorr > Testab+240ms where 240 ms represents the maximum delay in MAC layer between the notification for a DBN correction and the application of this DBN correction. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - Tcorr = 0.8 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - Tcorr = 1.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 2 Default 0.8
External Comment
HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Tcorr. No No
1122 / 1278
6.2.276 (T_GCH_ESTAB) - (Testab)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_GCH_ESTAB Testab
Supervision of loss of GCH link establishment for 16k channels. step size= 100 ms Treq_pending > Testab It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - Testab = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - Testab = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 2 Default 0.4
External Comment
HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Testab. No No
1123 / 1278
6.2.277 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GCH_INACTIVITY T_GCH_INACTIVITY
Timer to postpone the release of the "unused" GCHs of the M-EGCH link of a TRX (the condition for some GCHs of the M-EGCH link of a TRX to become "unused" is that some TBFs established on that TRX were released). step size = 1sec T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the cells of the BSS. This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the T3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are currently unused, but still established. If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.
Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 3
External Comment
The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer comes to make a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom performance: - The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the higher is the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface. - The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the lower is the average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite. No No
1124 / 1278
6.2.278 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
Timer to postpone the release of the last N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS GCHs established in a cell, when the last TBF has been released in the cell. There is no more (E)GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping some GCHs established will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell (e.g. WAP, WEB). step size = 1 sec If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers. Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 200 Default 20
External Comment
That timer is relevant only if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS is disabled. The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer comes to make a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom performance: - The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the higher is the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface. - The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the lower is the average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite links. This parameter may also be used to ensure that the BSS reserves at least one GCH resource in the serving cell while the MS is engaged in a Web browsing session.
No No
1125 / 1278
6.2.279 (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL) - (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF phase step size = 100 ms T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - between 1 sec and 2 sec if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links, - between 1.5 sec and 2.5 sec if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links. If Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, the operator shall ensure that T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 4000 Default 2000
External Comment
If GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, the duration of the extended UL phase in the MS is equal to this timer + 540ms. This is due to the delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side, PTU at BTS side). Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link. No No
1126 / 1278
6.2.280 (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING) (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Time which multiplied by the GBR defines a buffer level above which we may consider the BSS failed to provide the GBR step size = 1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 8 Maximum 100 Default 30
No No
1127 / 1278
6.2.281 (T_NC_PING_PONG) - (T_NC_PING_PONG)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_NC_PING_PONG T_NC_PING_PONG
Time during which the ping-pong offset is applied. step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 5000
No No
1128 / 1278
6.2.282 (T_NC_REJ_CELL) - (T_NC_REJ_CELL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NC_REJ_CELL T_NC_REJ_CELL
Time during which a NC cell reselection is inhibited towards that cell due to a previous NC cell reselection failure on that cell. step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 5000
No No
1129 / 1278
6.2.283 (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME) (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Maximum expected response time of a network server as seen from the MFS. step size: 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 5000 Default 1600
External Comment
1) The response time corresponds to T1 T2 where T2 corresponds to the time at which a command is sent to the SGSN and T1 the time at which the response is received on the MFS side. This command / response is e.g. the LLC PDU containing an FTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the file transfer. It can also be the LLC PDU containing an HTTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the page download. 2) The value of this timer defines the duration of the Delayed DL TBF Release procedure. In case the servers to which the GGSN serving the MFS is connected are not located at the same place, then the maximum server response time should be entered. However, note that the higher this timer is, the longer TBF releases will be delayed and therefore the more resources are used up.
No No
1130 / 1278
6.2.284 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_PS T_PAG_PS (BSC)
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_PS (MFS) T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
No No
1131 / 1278
6.2.285 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_PS T_PAG_PS (MFS)
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_PS (BSC) T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer) Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
No No
1132 / 1278
6.2.286 (T_PSI_PACCH) - (T_PSI_PACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T_PSI_PACCH T_PSI_PACCH
Scheduling period of PSI1, PSI13 or PSI14 on PACCH. step size =1sec, 00000 == Deactivated PSI scheduling on PACCH, 00001 == 1s, ... 11110 == T_PSI_PACCH = 30 sec Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 14
No No
1133 / 1278
6.2.287 (T_RESEL) - (T_RESEL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RESEL T_RESEL
Timer whose expiry allows a MS, which has performed an abnormal release with cell reselection, to reselect the previous cell. coded on 3 bits, 000= 5 sec, 001= 10 sec, 010 = 15 sec, 011 = 20 sec, 100= 30 sec, 101 = 60 sec, 110 = 120 sec, 111 = 300 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 300 Default 5
Coding rules
No No
1134 / 1278
6.2.288 (T_RIM_DISABILITY) - (T_RIM_DISABILITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RIM_DISABILITY T_RIM_DISABILITY
Timer supervising the disability of the adjacent target cell. When no RAN information has been received (no answer at the end of the retries or unknown destination), this parameter corresponds to the duration it is not possible to use the RIM NACC procedure for this target cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit mn Minimum 1 Maximum 360 Default 60
No No
1135 / 1278
6.2.289 (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT) - (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT
Timer supervising reception of the following RAN Information with multiple report. It allows to resynchronize the System Information messages with the remote entity in case of restart of the remote entity. Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit mn Minimum 15 Maximum 360 Default 60
No No
1136 / 1278
6.2.290 (T_RIM_RI) - (T_RIM_RI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_RIM_RI T_RIM_RI
Timer supervising reception of RAN Information ACK Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
No No
1137 / 1278
6.2.291 (T_RIM_RIR) - (T_RIM_RIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_RIM_RIR T_RIM_RIR
Timer supervising reception of RAN Information Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
No No
1138 / 1278
6.2.292 (T_ul_assign_PCCCH) - (T_ul_assign_pccch)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ul_assign_PCCCH T_ul_assign_pccch
The duration between the reception of the (EGPRS) Packet Channel Request message and one uplink radio block allocated to the MS. step size = 0.1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T_ul_asssign_pccch = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - T_ul_assign_pccch = 0.7 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 0.7 Default 0.4
No No
1139 / 1278
6.2.293 (T3168) - (T3168 (BSC))

This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF). Broadcast in SI13 within the GPRS Cell Options IE. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 001: 1000 ms 010: 1500 ms 011: 2000 ms 100: 2500 ms 101: 3000 ms 110: 3500 ms 111: 4000 ms. Equal to T3168 (MFS) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell, - T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in the serving cell and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM). - T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release of the Alcatel BSS.
1140 / 1278
No No
1141 / 1278
6.2.294 (T3168) - (T3168 (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3168 T3168 (MFS)
This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF). Broadcast in PSI1 within the GPRS Cell Options IE. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 001: 1000 ms 010: 1500 ms 011: 2000 ms 100: 2500 ms 101: 3000 ms 110: 3500 ms 111: 4000 ms. Equal to T3168 (BSC) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: - T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links, - T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM). - T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release of the Alcatel BSS.
1142 / 1278
No No
1143 / 1278
6.2.295 (T3192) - (T3192 (BSC))

Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of the final block by the MS. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 0 0 0: 500 msec 0 0 1: 1000 msec 0 1 0: 1500 msec 1 1 1: 200 msec Equal to T3192 (MFS) T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: ==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell: i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0) ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1) iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then : - some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed phase, and - the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS, which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready state. ==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell: i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0) ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell
1144 / 1278
Value
Unit ms
Minimum 200
Maximum 1500
Default 500
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS: 0 1 1: 0 msec 1 0 0: 80 msec 1 0 1: 120 msec 1 1 0: 160 msec No No
1145 / 1278
6.2.296 (T3192) - (T3192 (MFS))

Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of the final block by the MS. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 0 0 0: 500 msec 0 0 1: 1000 msec 0 1 0: 1500 msec 1 1 1: 200 msec Equal to T3192 (BSC) T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links: ==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell: i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0) ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1) iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then : - some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed phase, and - the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS, which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready state. ==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell: i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0) ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1). In IP mode, the operator shall ensure that T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell
1146 / 1278
Value
Unit ms
Minimum 200
Maximum 1500
Default 500
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS: 0 1 1: 0 msec 1 0 0: 80 msec 1 0 1: 120 msec 1 1 0: 160 msec No No
1147 / 1278
6.2.297 (T3212) - (T3212 (MFS))

This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive Periodic Location Update procedures. 0: no periodic location update, coded on 8 bits Equal to T3212 (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit 6 mn Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 30
No No
1148 / 1278
6.2.298 (TBF_CS_DL) - (TBF_CS_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS_DL TBF_CS_DL
Threshold defining the number of consecutive PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the Coding Scheme of a DL acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to CS-1. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 8
External Comment
If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, in case where N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite link, in case where N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. No No
1149 / 1278
6.2.299 (TBF_CS_UL) - (TBF_CS_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS_UL TBF_CS_UL
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS having a monoslot GPRS TBF before changing the coding scheme to CS1. For a multislot GPRS TBF, TBF_CS_UL_limit := TBF_CS_UL x n_allocated step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 32
No No
1150 / 1278
6.2.300 (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS3 BLER. The window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 512 Default 32
No No
1151 / 1278
6.2.301 (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS4 BLER. The window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 512 Default 32
No No
1152 / 1278
6.2.302 (TBF_DL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_DL_INIT_CS TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Value of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4 TBF_DL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2
No No
1153 / 1278
6.2.303 (TBF_MCS_DL) - (TBF_MCS_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_MCS_DL TBF_MCS_DL
Threshold defining the number of consecutive EGPRS PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the MCS of a DL acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to MCS-1. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 12
External Comment
If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. No No
1154 / 1278
6.2.304 (TBF_MCS_UL) - (TBF_MCS_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_MCS_UL TBF_MCS_UL
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS having a monoslot EGPRS TBF before changing the coding scheme to MCS1. For a multislot EGPRS TBF, TBF_MCS_UL_limit := TBF_MCS_UL x n_allocated_timeslots. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 192 Default 32
No No
1155 / 1278
6.2.305 (TBF_UL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_UL_INIT_CS TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Value of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4 TBF_UL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2
External Comment
Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link adaptation is enabled. No No
1156 / 1278
6.2.306 (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING) - (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Threshold above which the load of the serving cell is considered in a high load situation in the NC2 cell ranking process Step size of 10% 0 : 0%; 1: 10%; .... 10 : 100% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
This parameter is only relevant if the parameter NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS". The serving cell is considered in a low load situation when THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 0 %. The value of 0 % deactivates the load evaluation in the serving cell. The load situation of external cells is unknown in the serving cell. The BSS then computes the NC2 load of those cells as follows: - If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to a value lower than 100 %, then the cell is considered in a low load situation. - If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to 100 %, then the cell is considered in an high load situation
No No
1157 / 1278
6.2.307 (TOM8_PRIORITY) - (TOM8_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TOM8_PRIORITY TOM8_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined TOM8 Packet Flow Context Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
No No
1158 / 1278
6.2.308 (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad transmission efficiency in acknowledged mode. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 10
No No
1159 / 1278
6.2.309 (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad transmission efficiency in unacknowledged mode. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15
No No
1160 / 1278
6.2.310 (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Number of received RLC data blocks for GPRS TBF after which TX_EFFICIENCY is computed. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 500 Default 200
No No
1161 / 1278
6.2.311 (TX_INT) - (TX_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INT TX_INT
Number of PRACH timeslots to spread transmission of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50, coded from 0000 to 1111 It is recommended to set TX_INT so that the corresponding spreading time is about 240 ms. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 50 Default 8
Coding rules
No No
1162 / 1278
6.2.312 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INTEGER Tx_integer (MFS)
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111 Equal to Tx_Integer (BSC) When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF =0 TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1. When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH. The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2 successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the CCCH configuration as shown below: 1) for non combined CCCH: - Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms) - Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms) - Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms) - Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms) Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms) 2) for combined CCCH: - Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms) - Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms) - Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms) - Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms) - Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms) Note: - In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH frames per 51-multiframe - In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames per 51-multiframe.
Coding rules
Category Type SubSystem
Site (CAE) Number MFS
1163 / 1278
Instance Value
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF =0 TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1 No No
1164 / 1278
6.2.313 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject) - (WI_PR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject WI_PR
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or PACKET ACCESS REJECT in the nominal case (see the WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD parameter for the particular cases). WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
No No
1165 / 1278
6.2.314 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload) - (WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Logical Name Definition
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or PACKET ACCESS REJECT in case of PPC CPU or memory overload. WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
No No
1166 / 1278
6.2.315 (Weight_P10) - (Weight_P10)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Weight_P10 Weight_P10
Weight to be used for a TBF/PFC of priority 10 step size = 1 weight_Px >= weight_Py if x<y Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 6
No No
1167 / 1278

No No
1168 / 1278

No No
1169 / 1278

No No
1170 / 1278

No No
1171 / 1278

No No
1172 / 1278

No No
1173 / 1278

No No
1174 / 1278

No No
1175 / 1278

No No
1176 / 1278

No No
1177 / 1278

No No
1178 / 1278
7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters
1179 / 1278
7.1 Network (CDE)

7.1.1 (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS) - (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
This flag enables / disables downlink retransmission in the BTS. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
DL retransmission in the BTS will be disabled by the MFS in the cells having an Abis or an Ater satellite link (whatever the TRE type). In a cell with terrestrial Abis and Ater links, this feature is disabled for G3 TREs only. No No
1180 / 1278
7.1.2 (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN) - (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Minimum throughput gain required to be provided to the MS when performing a T2 or T3 TBF reallocation. step size = 0,1 Network (CDE) Threshold MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0,1 Maximum 5 Default 0,3
External Comment
Increasing the value of this parameter above 0,3 might block some reallocations for mobiles having a high multislot class (multislot class >= 30). No No
1181 / 1278
7.1.3 (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS) - (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Two definitions are possible : - If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "enabled" : number of GCHs required to be established due to the "Fast Initial PS Access" feature, - If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "disabled" : number of GCHs to keep established when there is no more (E)GPRS traffic in a cell (while the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer is running). Those GCHs will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 1
No No
1182 / 1278
7.2 Site (CAE)

7.2.1 (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION) (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Allows EDA operations for mobile stations in DTM mode. 0: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is not allowed, 1: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is allowed. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
This flag is relevant only if DTM and EDA are both activated. No No
1183 / 1278
7.2.2 (BEP_PERIOD) - (BEP_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules BEP_PERIOD BEP_PERIOD
Filter constant for EGPRS channel quality measurements. coded on 4 bits as follows: 0: 1 1: 2 2: 3 3: 4 4: 5 5: 7 6: 10 7: 12 8: 15 9: 20 10: 25 11: Reserved for future use 12: Reserved for future use 13: Reserved for future use 14: Reserved for future use 15: Reserved for future use Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 25 Default 10
External Comment
The BEP_PERIOD parameter defines the forgetting factor used in the MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averaging at the MS side. In case of cell without frequency hopping and without "fast" mobiles (i.e. not motorway or TGV coverage), it is advised to set a higher value (e.g. 25) in order to avoid spurious MCS changes causing higher BLER and throughput loss. No No
1184 / 1278
7.2.3 (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Number of received radio blocks for an EGPRS TBF after which E_TX_EFFICIENCY is computed. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 500 Default 200
No No
1185 / 1278
7.2.4 (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL) - (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Activation level of Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 0: EDA activated for all mobile stations (supporting the feature), 1: EDA activated for R99-onwards mobile stations (supporting the feature), 2: EDA activated for Rel-4-onwards mobile stations (supporting the feature). Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
External Comment
-This parameter is relevant only if EDA is activated (EN_EDA parameter). -The activation level may provide an artificial mean to limit the inter-operability risks due to mobile stations with uncorrected EDA implementation (EDA is a R97 feature but has been completely clarified in Rel-6). - R99 is detected through the Revision Level Indicator. - A mobile station is considered as Rel4-onwards compliant if it indicates the field "GERAN Feature Package 1" in its MS Radio Access Capability. No No
1186 / 1278
7.2.5 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT) - (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 20
External Comment
If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
1187 / 1278
7.2.6 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 24
External Comment
If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit_Satellite has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
1188 / 1278
7.2.7 (EN_EDA) - (EN_EDA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_EDA EN_EDA
Enables Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 0: EDA not activated, 1: EDA activated EN_EDA = 0 in case of extended cell Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
When EDA is activated, its activation domain is given by the EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL and ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION parameters. No No
1189 / 1278
7.2.8 (EN_IR_UL) - (EN_IR_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_IR_UL EN_IR_UL_per_cell
Enables/Disables Incremental redundancy for the uplink TBF in the BSS. 0: Disable, 1: Enable Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell), Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental Redundancy Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
The Incremental Redundancy for the uplink TBF feature is supported only from G4 onwards BTSs. No No
1190 / 1278
7.2.9 (EN_MCS1_in_CRP) - (EN_MCS1_in_CRP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCS1_in_CRP EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Enables the forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention resolution phase at one-phase access to make this phase more robust. 0: the BSS does not force uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the contention resolution phase at one-phase access. 1: the BSS forces uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the contention resolution phase at one-phase access. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
External Comment
The forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention resolution phase at one-phase access corresponds to the behaviour in B9. No No
1191 / 1278
7.2.10 (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL) (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the uplink TBF in the cell, in case of RLC in acknowledged mode. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL), Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental Redundancy Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
1192 / 1278
7.2.11 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when establishing GCHs for an EGPRS TBF associated to a "short data" MS transfer. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 3
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new TBF established after modification No No
1193 / 1278
7.2.12 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the DL EGPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 1 MCS-1 coded as 0 MCS-2 coded as 1 MCS-3 coded as 2 MCS-4 coded as 3 MCS-5 coded as 4 MCS-6 coded as 5 MCS-7 coded as 6 MCS-8 coded as 7 MCS-9 coded as 8
Coding rules
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Setting this parameter to MCS-2 might introduce some problems (because a MCS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be sent in the M-EGCH link in DL). - If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead. - Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
1194 / 1278
No No
1195 / 1278
7.2.13 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the UL EGPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Enumerated MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 2 MCS-1 coded as 0 MCS-2 coded as 1 MCS-3 coded as 2 MCS-4 coded as 3 MCS-5 coded as 4 MCS-6 coded as 5 MCS-7 coded as 6 MCS-8 coded as 7 MCS-9 coded as 8
Coding rules
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead. - Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing. No No
1196 / 1278
7.2.14 (MCS_AVG_PERIOD) - (MCS_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MCS_AVG_PERIOD MCS_AVG_PERIOD
Filtering period used for calculation of the forgetting factor applied to the current UL MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP samples in the averaging Modulation and Coding Scheme adaptation filter step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Reference MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.02 Maximum 5 Default 0.1
External Comment
1197 / 1278
7.2.15 (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU) - (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Number of free 64k Ater TSs that are kept "in reserve" in order to be able to serve some prioritary requests in cells managed by the GPU. The prioritary requests are the GCH establishment requests launched when the first TBF has to be established in a cell (useful to guarantee that MM traffic will be supported in any cell at any time). In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU = 0, then no Ater margin is managed. In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU > 0, RRM will ensure that N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU 64k Ater TSs are always free (i.e. not used by a GCH in the GPU). From then on, only prioritary requests will be allowed to establish some GCHs with those Ater resources.
Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode. - Increasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU will make the average number of unused Ater nibbles in the GPU increase. That corresponds to a loss of Ater resources on the field, as the on-going TBF traffic will never "benefit from the margin of Ater resources". But, on the other hand, the likelihood of not serving a prioritary request in the GPU will be become very low. - Decreasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU (to a non null value) will make it possible that prioritary requests cannot be served in case several such requests have to be served in a short period of time (i.e. before having had the time to "fill the Ater margin" up again), especially if the requests have to be served on several different DSPs (one 64k Ater TS will be consumed by each DSP). - Setting N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU to 0 will make it possible the cases where prioritary requests cannot be served at all. No No
1198 / 1278
7.2.16 (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA) - (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Minimum number of consecutive significantly-uplink biases observed during a transfer to allow a mobile station to use Extended Dynamic Allocation. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 1
This parameter can allow using EDA only in case of big UL transfers No No
1199 / 1278
7.2.17 (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Time period to request for an EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with measurements. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 60 Maximum 3000 Default 200
No No
1200 / 1278
7.2.18 (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_DL_INIT_MCS TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Value of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: MCS-1 MCS-2 MCS-3 MCS-4 MCS-5 MCS-6 MCS-7 MCS-8 MCS-9
Coding rules
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 3
The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled No No
1201 / 1278
7.2.19 (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_UL_INIT_MCS TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Value of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: MCS-1 MCS-2 MCS-3 MCS-4 MCS-5 MCS-6 MCS-7 MCS-8 MCS-9
Coding rules
TBF_UL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS]. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the cell (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the cell configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 3
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled. Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link adaptation is enabled. No No
1202 / 1278
8 DTM Telecom Parameters
1203 / 1278
8.1 Site (CAE)

8.1.1 (EN_DTM) - (EN_DTM)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_DTM EN_DTM
Enables/disables the support of dual transfer mode 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_DTM may be set to 1 only if : -CELL_RANGE = 0 -MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1 If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS, either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled" (network_operation_mode <> NMO I). Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
External Comment
((E)GPRS is mandatory for DTM operation, and at least 2 PDCHs are required in the PS zone for allocation of DTM resources to (at least) one DTM call, therefore, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD shall at least be equal to 2. No No
1204 / 1278
8.1.2 (MAX_LAPDM) - (MAX_LAPDM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_LAPDM MAX_LAPDM
Maximum number of LAPDm frames on which a layer 3 can be segmented into and be sent on the main DCCH. Coded on 3 bits: 000 : 5 001 : 6 .... 111 : 12 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 12 Default 7
Coding rules
No No
1205 / 1278
8.1.3 (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30) - (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30
Number of TCH usage information update periods to be waited by the BSC before moving the TCH of a DTM capable MS from the PS zone to the CS zone (intracell handover cause 30). "zero" means that the feature "avoid ping-pong between CS and PS zones for DTM MS" is not activated. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 0
External Comment
- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change applied on the handovers cause 30 detected after the modification (didnt apply on running timers). - Function available on BSC Evolution only. - the delay applied by the BSC is between N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 * TCH_INFO_PERIOD and (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 + 1) * TCH_INFO_PERIOD No No
1206 / 1278
9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters
1207 / 1278
9.1 Site (CAE)

9.1.1 (CI_LTE) - (CI_LTE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CI_LTE CI_LTE
This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 36.300. Binary value on 28 bits is expanded to 32 bits (with the four Most Significant Bits set to "1"). (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE and CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a LTE cell inside the OMC Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 268435455 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- The CI_LTE is equivalent to the long/standard eNode-B Id. - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. No No
1208 / 1278
9.1.2 (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) - (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G
Default priority associated to any UARFCN not explicitely broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 1 "0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest The DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of a given BSS shall be different from any priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of its related 2G cells (which has at least one neighbour 3G or LTE cell for reselection), and different from any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of all those target neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1209 / 1278
9.1.3 (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G
Default minimum received level associated to any UARFCN not explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = (dBm + 119) / 2, step size = 2 dBm Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit dBm Minimum -119 Maximum -57 Default -119
External Comment
1210 / 1278
9.1.4 (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G) - (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DEFAULT_THRESH_3G DEFAULT_THRESH_3G
Default threshold associated to any UARFCN not explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
1211 / 1278
9.1.5 (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Enables/Disables the GSM to E-UTRAN FDD cell reselection and defines the LTE search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacent EUARFCNs can be configured at LTE cell level only (ARFCN_LTE). Those EUARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, 2: Enabled with LTE search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, 3: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1, 4: Enabled with LTE search activated with flexible priority while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state. - Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell for which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 or EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0). - EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <> disabled at the same time. - EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <> disabled at the same time. - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0. - It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) - It is not allowed to have EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 if the cell is owned by a BSC connected to a legacy MFS. - if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then they shall have the same value. Value 3 should be used only in case of good LTE FDD coverage. Site (CAE)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category
1212 / 1278
Type SubSystem Instance Value
Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
External Comment
- If EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the LTE search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This LTE search deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter. - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1213 / 1278
9.1.6 (EUARFCN) - (ARFCN_LTE(FDD))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EUARFCN ARFCN_LTE(FDD)
Downlink FDD E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (EUARFCN) of an external LTE FDD cell. Only the following downlink EUARFCN ranges are standardized for FDD: I) 0 599 and II) 600 1199 and III) 1200 1949 and IV) 1950 2399 and V) 2400 2649 and VI) 2650 - 2749 and VII) 2750 - 3449 and VIII) 3450 - 3799 and IX) 3800 4149 and X) 4150 4749 and XI) 4750 4999 and XII) 5000 5179 and XIII) 5180 5279 and XIV) 5280 5379 and XVII) 5730 - 5849 - For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinct ARFCN_LTE(FDD) among all the neighbour LTE FDD cells target for reselection.
Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default None
1214 / 1278
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_LTE is FDD - The FDD EUARFCNs are used on the Air interface. - The FDD EUARFCNs of the LTE neighbour cells configured for reselection are broadcast on BCCH. - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1215 / 1278
9.1.7 (GERAN_PRIORITY) - (GERAN_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GERAN_PRIORITY GERAN_PRIORITY
Gives the priority for the serving cell. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 1, "0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest When a given serving 2G cell has at least one neighbour 3G or LTE cell for reselection, then GERAN_PRIORITY shall be different from any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of its neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection, and different from the DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of its BSS. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1216 / 1278
9.1.8 (H_PRIO) - (H_PRIO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition H_PRIO H_PRIO
Hysteresis used in the priority reselection algorithm by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 1 Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC 0: 6: Rule disabled 1: 5: 5 dB 2: 4: 4 dB 3: 3: 3 dB Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit dB Minimum 3 Maximum 6 Default 6
Coding rules
External Comment
1217 / 1278
9.1.9 (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH) - (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH
Number of resources blocks (NRB) over which an MS/UE LTE-capable could measure. 0 (coded) = 6 1 (coded) = 15 2 (coded) = 25 3 (coded) = 50 4 (coded) = 75 5 (coded) = 100 All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE shall be given the same MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 6 Maximum 100 Default 6
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1218 / 1278
9.1.10 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell) - (MCC_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell MCC_LTE
Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell of the own or of a foreign PLMN. 3 digits BCD - The MCC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs - (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a LTE cell inside the OMC Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only No No
1219 / 1278
9.1.11 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell) - (MNC_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell MNC_LTE
Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN. 3 digits BCD - The MNC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs. - (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a LTE cell inside the OMC Site (CAE) Reference BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only - The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table. MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111) MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
1220 / 1278
9.1.12 (PRIORITY_3G) - (PRIORITY_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PRIORITY_3G PRIORITY_3G
Priority associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 1, "0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest. - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same PRIORITY_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). - The PRIORITY_3G of a given 3G cell, neighbour for reselection to one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and different from any priority (PRIORITY_LTE) of the LTE cell(s) (if any) neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S. Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1221 / 1278
9.1.13 (PRIORITY_LTE) - (PRIORITY_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PRIORITY_LTE PRIORITY_LTE
Priority associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 1, "0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest. - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE shall be given the same PRIORITY_LTE value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). - The PRIORITY_LTE of a given LTE cell, neighbour for reselection to one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and different from any priority (PRIORITY_3G) of the 3G cell(s) (if any) neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S. Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 7
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
1222 / 1278
9.1.14 (QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (QRXLEVMIN_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition QRXLEVMIN_3G QRXLEVMIN_3G
Minimum received level required for a given UARFCN broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = (dBm + 119) / 2, step size = 2 dBm All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same QRXLEVMIN_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit dBm Minimum -119 Maximum -57 Default -119
External Comment
1223 / 1278
9.1.15 (QRXLEVMIN_LTE) - (QRXLEVMIN_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition QRXLEVMIN_LTE QRXLEVMIN_LTE
Minimum received level required for a given EUARFCN broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = (dBm + 140) / 2, step size = 2 dBm All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE shall be given the same QRXLEVMIN_LTE value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit dBm Minimum -140 Maximum -78 Default -140
External Comment
1224 / 1278
9.1.16 (Qsearch_P_LTE) - (Qsearch_P_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_P_LTE Qsearch_P_LTE
Threshold for searching for LTE cells in GPRS depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm (below) 1: -94: -94 dBm (below) 2: -90: -90dBm (below) 3: -86: -86dBm (below) 4: -82: -82 dBm (below) 5: -78: -78 dBm (below) 6: -74: -74 dBm (below) 7: -70: Always search for LTE neighbour cells 8: -78: -78 dBm (above) 9: -74: -74 dBm (above) 10: -70: -70 dBm (above) 11: -66: -66 dBm (above) 12: -62: -62 dBm (above) 13: -58: -58 dBm (above) 14: -54: -54 dBm (above) 15: -50: Never search for LTE neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
External Comment
1225 / 1278
9.1.17 (RAT_LTE) - (RAT_LTE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RAT_LTE RAT_LTE
This parameter defines the radio access technology of an external LTE cell. 0: FDD 1: TDD Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC LTE cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. No No
1226 / 1278
9.1.18 (T_RESELECTION) - (T_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RESELECTION T_RESELECTION
Period during which the cell reselection criteria of the priority algorithm must be verified to allow the cell reselection; used by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = (sec / 5) - 1, step size = 5 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 20 Default 5
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted No No
1227 / 1278
9.1.19 (THRESH_2G_LOW) - (THRESH_2G_LOW)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_2G_LOW THRESH_2G_LOW
Gives the threshold of the GSM serving cell (and all measured GSM cells). Used in the priority algorithm for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 2 dB Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC 0: 0: 0 dB 1: 2: 2 dB 2: 4: 4 dB 3: 6: 6 dB 4: 8: 8 dB 5: 10: 10 dB 6: 12: 12 dB 7: 14: 14 dB 8: 16: 16 dB 9: 18: 18 dB 10: 20: 20 dB 11: 22: 22 dB 12: 24: 24 dB 13: 26: 26 dB 14: 28: 28 dB 15: 30: always select a LTE cell is possible Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 30
Coding rules
External Comment
1228 / 1278
9.1.20 (THRESH_3G_HIGH) - (THRESH_3G_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_3G_HIGH THRESH_3G_HIGH
Threshold (high) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same THRESH_3G_HIGH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). - THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
1229 / 1278
9.1.21 (THRESH_3G_LOW) - (THRESH_3G_LOW)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_3G_LOW THRESH_3G_LOW
Threshold (low) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same THRESH_3G_LOW value (to be checked at Network level and on a per RAT basis). - THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
1230 / 1278
9.1.22 (THRESH_LTE_HIGH) - (THRESH_LTE_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_LTE_HIGH THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Threshold (high) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_HIGH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). - THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
1231 / 1278
9.1.23 (THRESH_LTE_LOW) - (THRESH_LTE_LOW)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_LTE_LOW THRESH_LTE_LOW
Threshold (low) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_LOW value (to be checked on a per RAT basis). - THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH Site (CAE) Number BSC LTE cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
External Comment
1232 / 1278
9.1.24 (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH) - (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH
Threshold for the serving cell that controls inter-RAT measurements. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE. step size = 3 dBm Coded value (decimal): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm 1: -95: -95 dBm 2: -92: -92 dBm 3: -89: -89 dBm 4: -86: -86 dBm 5: -83: -83 dBm 6: -80: -80 dBm 7: -77: -77 dBm 8: -74: -74 dBm 9: -71: -71 dBm 10: -68: -68 dBm 11: -65: -65 dBm 12: -62: -62 dBm 13: -59: -59 dBm 14: -56: -56 dBm 15: -53: Always Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -53 Default -53
Coding rules
External Comment
1233 / 1278
1234 / 1278
10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters
1235 / 1278
10.1 Network (CDE)

10.1.1 (CGI_3G_REQUIRED) - (CGI_3G_REQD)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CGI_3G_REQUIRED CGI_3G_REQD
Controls the format of an external 3G cell identification, sent to the MSC on the A interface for 2G to 3G handover. 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used Alcatel-Lucent recommend to set the CGI_3G_REQD parameter to 1 provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_3G_REQD parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G to 3G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any additional Telecom outage. Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
External Comment
Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1236 / 1278
10.2 Site (CAE)

10.2.1 (A_ECNO_HO) - (A_ECNO_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_ECNO_HO A_ECNO_HO
Window size for Ec/No level averages for 2G to 3G handover Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1237 / 1278
10.2.2 (Cell Capacity Class) - (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell Capacity Class CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
Capacity class of the cell, measured on a linear scale, ranging from 1 to 100. binary value on 8 bits the Cell Capacity Class shall follow the recommended rule: "In order to fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacity class, ranging from 1 to 100: Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1 shall indicate the minimum capacity class, and 100 shall indicate the maximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on a linear scale. The default value of Cell Capacity Class should depend on the number of available TCHs in the cell and since there may be up to 126 TCH channels in one GSM cell: Cell_Capacity_Class = int{[(99/125) x (NTCH - 1)] + 1} where NTCH is the number of all TCH channels in the Cell."
Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 100
No No
1238 / 1278
10.2.3 (CI_3G) - (CI_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CI_3G CI_3G
This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401. Binary value on 16 bits (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cell Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. No No
1239 / 1278
10.2.4 (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO) (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Allows handovers towards 3G cells for a given MS when I.E. Service Handover is missing and the load in the serving cell is high (see THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) 0 : disable, 1 : enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
No No
1240 / 1278
10.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN FDD cell reselections and defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacent UARFCNs can be configured either at BSS level (FDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell level (ARFCN_3G). Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, 2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state. 3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1. 4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state. - EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <> disabled at the same time. - FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both). - Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell for which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 or EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0). - if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then they shall have the same value. - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0. - It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) - if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then they shall have the same value. Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G FDD coverage.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
1241 / 1278
Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
External Comment
- If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. - If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message will not be sent). - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1242 / 1278
10.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA cell reselections and defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacent UARFCNs can be configured either at BSS level (TDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell level (ARFCN_3G). Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, 2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state. 3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1. 4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state.
Coding rules
1243 / 1278
Mandatory rules
- EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at the same time - EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <> disabled at the same time. - TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection. - Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled. - if both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then they shall have the same value. - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0. - It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) - For a given 2G cell, where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, if FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT = 1 then there shall be no more than 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G TDD cells target for reselection and there shall be no more than 4 distinct ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all the neighbour LTE TDD cells target for reselection. Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G TDD coverage. Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
1244 / 1278
External Comment
- If EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1245 / 1278
10.2.7 (EN_3G_DIVERSITY) - (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_3G_DIVERSITY EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD)
This parameter indicates if diversity is applied for an external 3G FDD cell. 1 bit: 0 diversity is not applied, 1 diversity is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
External Comment
- Significant only if RAT_3G is FDD. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. No No
1246 / 1278
10.2.8 (EN_3G_HO) - (EN_3G_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_3G_HO EN_3G_HO
This flag enables/disables the 2G to 3G FDD handover. 0: disabled, 1: enabled For Evolium serving cell : - if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G, then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells for handover. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
1247 / 1278
10.2.9 (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO) (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Allows sending by the MS of Compressed Inter-RAT HO information 0 : disable, 1 : enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
External Comment
Shall be set to 1 only if all RNCs neighbour to this BSS support the feature. No No
1248 / 1278
10.2.10 (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION) (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Defines the CPICH measurements used in the 2G to 3G cell reselection 0: Only 1 CPICH measurement is used 1: CPICH Ec/No and RSCP measurements must be used This parameter can be set on 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION <>0 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
No No
1249 / 1278
10.2.11 (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION) - (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Enables a fast 3G/LTE (FDD or TDD) cell reselection at 2G CS call release. 0:fast 3G/LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is not used. 1:only fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used. 2:only fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used. 3:fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used, 3G otherwise. - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0. - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0. It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
External Comment
- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification in dedicated Channel Release messages of the current calls. No No
1250 / 1278
10.2.12 (FDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (FDD_ARFCN_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_ARFCN_LIST FDD_ARFCN_LIST
List of neighbour Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G FDD neighbor cell, adjacent to the BSS. Up to 3 FDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for 2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method). The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN. - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to -1) shall be different from each other. - Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized: I) 10562-10838 and II) 9662-9938 and III) 1162-1513 and IV) 1537-1738 and V) 4357-4458 and VI) 4387-4413 and VII) 2237- 2563 and VIII) 2937-3088 and IX) 9237-9387 X) 3112-3388 XI) 3712-3812 XII) 3837- 3903 XIII) 4017-4043 XIV) 4117-4143 - FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both). - Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell for which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 or EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0). Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSS
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance
1251 / 1278
Value
Unit None
Minimum 0
Maximum 16383
Default None
External Comment
- The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface. - The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on BCCH. - Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1252 / 1278
10.2.13 (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) - (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_GPRS_Qoffset FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection in GPRS Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible 1: -28: -28 dB 2: -24: -24 dB 3: -20: -20 dB 4: -16: -16 dB 5: -12: -12 dB 6: -8: -8 dB 7: -4: -4 dB 8: 0: 0 dB 9: 4: 4 dB 10: 8: 8 dB 11: 12: 12 dB 12: 16: 16 dB 13: 20: 20 dB 14: 24: 24 dB 15: 28: 28 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1253 / 1278
10.2.14 (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) - (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Number of the strongest 3G cells to be reported by the MS in the measurement report message Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 2
External Comment
This parameter is meaningful only if EN_3G_HO is set to enabled. If disabled, this parameter is considered as equal to zero (the MS shall report only 2G cells). This parameter is broadcast on SACCH. No No
1254 / 1278
10.2.15 (FDD_Qmin) - (FDD_Qmin(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_Qmin FDD_Qmin(BSC)
Minimum threshold for Ec/Io for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. 0 = -20 dB 1 = -6 dB 2 = -18 dB 3 = -8dB 4 = -16dB 5 = -10dB 6 = -14dB 7 = -12dB Equal to FDD_Qmin(MFS) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -20 Maximum -6 Default -12
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1255 / 1278
10.2.16 (FDD_Qmin_Offset) - (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_Qmin_Offset FDD_Qmin_Offset
Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value coded on 3 bits: 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 2 dB, 2 = 4 dB, 3 = 6 dB, 4 = 8 dB, 5 = 10 dB, 6 = 12 dB, 7 = 14 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 0
Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection = 1 No No
1256 / 1278
10.2.17 (FDD_Qoffset) - (FDD_Qoffset (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_Qoffset FDD_Qoffset (BSC)
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible 1: -28: -28 dB 2: -24: -24 dB 3: -20: -20 dB 4: -16: -16 dB 5: -12: -12 dB 6: -8: -8 dB 7: -4: -4 dB 8: 0: 0 dB 9: 4: 4 dB 10: 8: 8 dB 11: 12: 12 dB 12: 16: 16 dB 13: 20: 20 dB 14: 24: 24 dB 15: 28: 28 dB Equal to FDD_Qoffset(MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1257 / 1278
10.2.18 (FDD_RSCPmin) - (FDD_RSCPmin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_RSCPmin FDD_RSCPmin
Minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. coded on 4bits: 0 = -114 dBm, 1 = -112 dBm, 2 = -110 dBm, 3 = -108 dBm, 4 = -106 dBm, 5 = -104 dBm, 6 = -102 dBm, 7 = -100 dBm, 8 = -98 dBm, 9 = -96 dBm, 10 = -94 dBm, 11 = -92 dBm, 12 = -90 dBm, 13 = -88 dBm, 14 = -86 dBm, 15 = -84 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -114 Maximum -84 Default -102
Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection=1 No No
1258 / 1278
10.2.19 (LAC_3G) - (LAC_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LAC_3G LAC_3G
This parameter indicates the Location Area Code of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 24.008 (in the HANDOVER COMMAND message on A interface). binary value on 16 bits Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
1259 / 1278
10.2.20 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell) - (MCC_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell MCC_3G
Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD) of the own or of a foreign PLMN. 3 digits BCD - The MCC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the PLMN id selected by the operator. - (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC. - (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cell. Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
No No
1260 / 1278
10.2.21 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell) - (MNC_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell MNC_3G
Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD) of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN. 3 digits BCD - The MNC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the PLMN id selected by the operator. - (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC. - (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cell. Site (CAE) Reference BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default None
External Comment
The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table. MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111) MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
1261 / 1278
10.2.22 (Qsearch_C) - (Qsearch_C)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_C Qsearch_C
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in dedicated mode depending whether the received signal level of the serving cell is below or above the threshold. Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm (below) 1: -94: -94 dBm (below) 2: -90: -90dBm (below) 3: -86: -86dBm (below) 4: -82: -82 dBm (below) 5: -78: -78 dBm (below) 6: -74: -74 dBm (below) 7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells 8: -78: -78 dBm (above) 9: -74: -74 dBm (above) 10: -70: -70 dBm (above) 11: -66: -66 dBm (above) 12: -62: -62 dBm (above) 13: -58: -58 dBm (above) 14: -54: -54 dBm (above) 15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell where at least one 2G to 3G adjacency has been defined, Qsearch_C =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -70
Coding rules
External Comment
This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold. This parameter is broadcast on SACCH No No
1262 / 1278
10.2.23 (Qsearch_I) - (Qsearch_I)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_I Qsearch_I
Threshold for searching for 3G cells depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold. Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm (below) 1: -94: -94 dBm (below) 2: -90: -90dBm (below) 3: -86: -86dBm (below) 4: -82: -82 dBm (below) 5: -78: -78 dBm (below) 6: -74: -74 dBm (below) 7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells 8: -78: -78 dBm (above) 9: -74: -74 dBm (above) 10: -70: -70 dBm (above) 11: -66: -66 dBm (above) 12: -62: -62 dBm (above) 13: -58: -58 dBm (above) 14: -54: -54 dBm (above) 15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_I =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
External Comment
This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold. This parameter is broadcast on BCCH No No
1263 / 1278
10.2.24 (Qsearch_P) - (Qsearch_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_P Qsearch_P
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm (below) 1: -94: -94 dBm (below) 2: -90: -90dBm (below) 3: -86: -86dBm (below) 4: -82: -82 dBm (below) 5: -78: -78 dBm (below) 6: -74: -74 dBm (below) 7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells 8: -78: -78 dBm (above) 9: -74: -74 dBm (above) 10: -70: -70 dBm (above) 11: -66: -66 dBm (above) 12: -62: -62 dBm (above) 13: -58: -58 dBm (above) 14: -54: -54 dBm (above) 15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_P =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
External Comment
This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold in GPRS. This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1264 / 1278
10.2.25 (Qsearch_P_PTM) - (Qsearch_P_PTM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_P_PTM Qsearch_P_PTM
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS packet transfer mode depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -98: -98 dBm (below) 1: -94: -94 dBm (below) 2: -90: -90dBm (below) 3: -86: -86dBm (below) 4: -82: -82 dBm (below) 5: -78: -78 dBm (below) 6: -74: -74 dBm (below) 7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells 8: -78: -78 dBm (above) 9: -74: -74 dBm (above) 10: -70: -70 dBm (above) 11: -66: -66 dBm (above) 12: -62: -62 dBm (above) 13: -58: -58 dBm (above) 14: -54: -54 dBm (above) 15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
External Comment
This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold in GPRS packet transfer mode. This parameter is sent in Packet Measurement Order on PACCH. No No
1265 / 1278
10.2.26 (RAT_3G) - (RAT_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RAT_3G RAT_3G
This parameter defines UMTS radio access technology of an external 3G cell. 0: FDD 1: TDD A 3G TDD cell can be configured for "(blind) cell reselection" only. Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default None
Coding rules
No No
1266 / 1278
10.2.27 (RNC_ID) - (RNC_ID_3G)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RNC_ID RNC_ID_3G
This parameter indicates the RNC Identifier or the Extended RNC Identifier of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401 (in HO Required message sent to the MSC on A interface). Binary value on 16 bits. (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cel. Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default None
External Comment
1267 / 1278
10.2.28 (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G) - (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD
This parameter indicates the Primary Scrambling Code of an external 3G FDD cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 25.213. Binary value on 9 bits. - For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD), SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both). Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 511 Default None
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is FDD - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. No No
1268 / 1278
10.2.29 (T3121) - (T3121)

This timer is started by sending an INTER SYSTEM TO UTRAN HANDOVER message to the MS and is normally stopped when the MS has correctly seized the UTRAN channel(s). Its purpose is to keep the old channels sufficiently long for the MS to be able to return to the old channels, and to release the channels if the MS is lost. step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
No No
1269 / 1278
10.2.30 (TDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (TDD_ARFCN_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TDD_ARFCN_LIST TDD_ARFCN_LIST
List of neighbour Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G TDD neighbor cell (TD-SCDMA), adjacent to the BSS. Up to 3 TDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for 2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method). The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN. - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to 1) shall be different from each other. - Only following downlink TDD UARFCN ranges are standardised : a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121 b) 9254-9546 and 9654-9946 c) 9554-9646 d) 12854-13096 e) 11504-11996 f) 9404-9596 - TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection. - Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled. Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default None
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1270 / 1278
External Comment
- The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface. - The TDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on BCCH. - Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls. No No
1271 / 1278
10.2.31 (TDD_Qoffset) - (TDD_Qoffset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TDD_Qoffset TDD_Qoffset
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN TDD cell re-selection. Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC 0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible 1: -28: -28 dB 2: -24: -24 dB 3: -20: -20 dB 4: -16: -16 dB 5: -12: -12 dB 6: -8: -8 dB 7: -4: -4 dB 8: 0: 0 dB 9: 4: 4 dB 10: 8: 8 dB 11: 12: 12 dB 12: 16: 16 dB 13: 20: 20 dB 14: 24: 24 dB 15: 28: 28 dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH. No No
1272 / 1278
10.2.32 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT) (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Load threshold determining whether a 3G to 2G handover request shall be rejected in load situation; the feature is deactivated by setting THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT to its maximum value 100%. binary value on 8 bits THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT shall be lower than the 2G load thresholds HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD or equal to 100%. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
No No
1273 / 1278
10.2.33 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) - (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Load threshold on the serving cell below which handovers towards 3G cells are forbidden when I.E. Service Handover is missing (whatever EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO value) Step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
Value 0 disables the feature. No No
1274 / 1278
10.2.34 (THR_ECNO_HO) - (THR_ECNO_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules THR_ECNO_HO THR_ECNO_HO
Ec/No threshold above which a handover to UTRAN may be triggered step size = 0.5 dB, coded over 6 bits 0: "HO to 3G attempted whatever the Ec/No", 1: -24.0, 2: -23.5, 3: -23, ..., 48: -0.5, 49: 0.0 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -24.5 Maximum 0 Default -15
No No
1275 / 1278
10.2.35 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(FDD))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition UARFCN ARFCN_3G(FDD)
Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (UARFCN) of an external 3G FDD cell. - Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized: I) 10562-10838 and II) 9662-9938 and III) 1162-1513 and IV) 1537-1738 and V) 4357-4458 and VI) 4387-4413 and VII) 2237- 2563 and VIII) 2937-3088 and IX) 9237-9387 X) 3112-3388 XI) 3712-3812 XII) 3837- 3903 XIII) 4017-4043 XIV) 4117-4143 - For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 3 distinct ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both). - For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for reselection (or both). - For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD), SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both). - FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both). Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default None
1276 / 1278
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is FDD - The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface. - The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells configured for reselection (or both) are broadcast on BCCH. - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. No No
1277 / 1278
10.2.36 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(TDD))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition UARFCN ARFCN_3G(TDD)
Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (UARFCN) of an external 3G TDD cell. - Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized: a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121 b) 9254- 9546 and 9654-9946 c) 9554-9646 d) 12854-13096 e) 11504-11996 f) 9404-9596 - For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G TDD cells target for reselection. - TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection. Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default None
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is TDD - The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface. - The TDD UARFCns of the 3G neighbour cells (configured for reselection) are broadcast on BCCH - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification. No No
1278 / 1278

Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Alcatel BSS Parameter Dictionary

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Alcatel-Lucent GSM

Telecom Parameters Dictionary

OMC Document Reference Guide Release B11

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

BLANK PAGE BREAK

Status Short title

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Audience Assumed Knowledge

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

1.1 Parameter Classification

1.2 Parameter Description

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1 Site (CAE)

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Coding rules Mandatory rules

Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules

Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters